Cat. No.

W236-E1-07

SYSMAC
Programmable Controllers
C200HS

INSTALLATION GUIDE
C200HS Programmable Controllers
Installation Guide
Revised March 2003
iv
Notice:
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator
and only for the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed
the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam-
age to property.

! DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

! WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

! Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury, or property damage.

OMRON Product References

All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers
to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means
“word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.
The abbreviation “PC” means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for any-
thing else.

Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of
information.
Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation
of the product.

1, 2, 3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.

 OMRON, 1993
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permis-
sion of OMRON.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is
constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change
without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no
responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa-
tion contained in this publication.

v
vi
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
SECTION 1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1-1 What is a Control System? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1-2 The Role of the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1-3 How Does a PC Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1-4 New C200HS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1-5 Comparisons Between C200HS and C200H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1-6 Compatibility of C200HS and C200H Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SECTION 2
System Configuration and Unit Description . . . . . . . . . . 15
2-1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2-2 CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2-3 Expansion I/O Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2-4 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2-5 I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
SECTION 3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3-1 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3-2 Mounting Units to the Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3-3 Installing Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3-4 I/O Connecting Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3-5 Mounting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3-6 Installing Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
SECTION 4
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4-1 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4-2 AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4-3 DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4-4 RUN Output Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4-5 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4-6 Backplane Insulation Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4-7 Standard I/O Unit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4-8 Input Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4-9 Output Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4-10 External Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4-11 System Design and Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
SECTION 5
Peripheral Devices and System Expansion . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5-1 Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
5-2 Checking Initial C200HS Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5-3 Expanding the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5-4 Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5-5 Ladder Support Software (LSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5-6 SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

vii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 6
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6-1 Alarm Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6-2 Programmed Alarms and Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6-3 Reading and Clearing Errors and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6-4 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6-5 CPU Racks and Expansion I/O Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
6-6 Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
6-7 Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

SECTION 7
Inspection and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7-1 CPU and Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7-2 Output Unit Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7-3 Output Unit Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7-4 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Appendices
A Standard Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
B Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

viii
About this Manual:
This manual describes the installation of C200HS Programmable Controllers, and it includes the sections
described below. Programming and operating information is provided in the C200HS Operation Manual.

Please read this manual completely and be sure you understand the information provided before attempt-
ing to install a C200HS PC. Be sure to read the precautions in the following section.

Section 1 is an introduction to Programmable Controllers (or PCs). General information is provided on

PCs and how they work. This section also provides an overview of the new features of the C200HS and
the major differences between the C200HS and the C200H.
Section 2 provides a description of all the components of the C200HS. The names of all the individual
parts of each Unit are given.
Section 3 describes how to install a PC System, including mounting the various Units and configuring the
System.
Section 4 provides the information necessary to wire a C200HS System.
Section 5 provides general information about the Programming Console, LSS, SSS, and ways in which
the C200HS System can be expanded for more versatility.
Section 6 provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PC operation. It also
provides troubleshooting charts for CPU Racks, Expansion I/O Racks, Input Units, and Output Units.
Section 7 covers maintenance and inspection, and explains how to replace consumable components
such as fuses, relays, and batteries.
Appendixes, a Glossary, and an Index are also provided.

! WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in
personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each
section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section
and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given.

ix
 PRECAUTIONS
This section provides general precautions for using the Programmable Controller (PC) and related devices.
The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the PC. You must read
this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a PC system.

1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii

2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
5 Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv

xi
Operating Environment Precautions 4

1 Intended Audience
This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowl-
edge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent).
• Personnel in charge of installing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of designing FA systems.
• Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities.

2 General Precautions
The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications
described in the operation manuals.
Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual
or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement
machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that
may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult
your OMRON representative.
Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are
sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the
systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms.
This manual provides information for programming and operating OMRON PCs.
Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this
manual close at hand for reference during operation.

! WARNING It is extremely important that a PC and all PC Units be used for the specified
purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can
directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON
representative before applying a PC System to the abovementioned
applications.

3 Safety Precautions
! WARNING Never attempt to disassemble any Units while power is being supplied. Doing so
may result in serious electrical shock or electrocution.

! WARNING Never touch any of the terminals while power is being supplied. Doing so may
result in serious electrical shock or electrocution.

4 Operating Environment Precautions

Do not operate the control system in the following places.
• Where the PC is exposed to direct sunlight.
• Where the ambient temperature is below 0°C or over 55°C.
• Where the PC may be affected by condensation due to radical temperature
changes.
• Where the ambient humidity is below 10% or over 90%.
• Where there is any corrosive or inflammable gas.
• Where there is excessive dust, saline air, or metal powder.
• Where the PC is affected by vibration or shock.
• Where any water, oil, or chemical may splash on the PC.

xii
Application Precautions 5

! Caution The operating environment of the PC System can have a large effect on the lon-
gevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can lead to
malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PC System. Be
sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installa-
tion and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system.

5 Application Precautions
Observe the following precautions when using the PC.

! WARNING Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to serious or possibly
fatal injury. Always heed these precautions.
• Always ground the system to 100 Ω or less when installing the system to pro-
tect against electrical shock.
• Always turn off the power supply to the PC before attempting any of the follow-
ing. Performing any of the following with the power supply turned on may lead
to electrical shock:
• Mounting or removing any Units (e.g., I/O Units, CPU Unit, etc.) or memory
cassettes.
• Assembling any devices or racks.
• Connecting or disconnecting any cables or wiring.
! Caution Failure to abide by the following precautions could lead to faulty operation or the
PC or the system or could damage the PC or PC Units. Always heed these pre-
cautions.
• Use the Units only with the power supplies and voltages specified in the opera-
tion manuals. Other power supplies and voltages may damage the Units.
• Take measures to stabilize the power supply to conform to the rated supply if it
is not stable.
• Provide circuit breakers and other safety measures to provide protection
against shorts in external wiring.
• Do not apply voltages exceeding the rated input voltage to Input Units. The
Input Units may be destroyed.
• Do not apply voltages exceeding the maximum switching capacity to Output
Units. The Output Units may be destroyed.
• Always disconnect the LG terminal when performing withstand voltage tests.
• Install all Units according to instructions in the operation manuals. Improper
installation may cause faulty operation.
• Provide proper shielding when installing in the following locations:
• Locations subject to static electricity or other sources of noise.
• Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
• Locations subject to possible exposure to radiation.
• Locations near to power supply lines.
• Be sure to tighten Backplane screws, terminal screws, and cable connector
screws securely.
• Do not attempt to take any Units apart, to repair any Units, or to modify any
Units in any way.
! Caution The following precautions are necessary to ensure the general safety of the sys-
tem. Always heed these precautions.
• Provide double safety mechanisms to handle incorrect signals that can be
generated by broken signal lines or momentary power interruptions.
• Provide external interlock circuits, limit circuits, and other safety circuits in
addition to any provided within the PC to ensure safety.

xiii
Conformance to EC Directives 6

6 Conformance to EC Directives
Observe the following precautions when installing the C200HS-CPU01-EC and
C200HS-CPU21-EC that conform to the EC Directives.
1, 2, 3... 1. Since the C200HS PC is defined as an open type, be sure to install it inside a
panel.
2. Provide reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power source
connected to the DC I/O Unit and for the CPU with a DC power source.
3. The C200HS PC that conforms to the EC Directives also conforms, as an
individual unit, to the Common Emission Standard (EN50081-2) of the EC
Directives. When incorporated into a device, however, the C200HS PC may
not satisfy this Standard due to the noise produced by the contact output
when it switches on and off. In such a case, it will be necessary to take coun-
termeasures such as connecting a surge or arc killer, or providing an exter-
nal means of protection for the PC. The countermeasures taken to satisfy
the Standard vary depending on the load devices, wiring, machinery config-
uration, etc. Described on page 130 are examples of countermeasures to be
taken to reduce the noise.
Criteria for Taking Countermeasures
(Refer to EN50081-2 for details.)
Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the
whole system with the PC included is less than 5 times per minute.
Countermeasures are not required if the frequency of load switching for the
whole system with the PC included is more than 5 times per minute.

xiv
 SECTION 1
Introduction
This section provides general information about Programmable Controllers (PCs) and how they fit into a Control System. It
also provides an overview of the new features of the C200HS and the major differences between the C200HS and the C200H.

1-1 What is a Control System? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1-2 The Role of the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1-2-1 Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1-2-2 Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
1-3 How Does a PC Work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1-4 New C200HS Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1-4-1 Improved Memory Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1-4-2 Faster Execution Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1-4-3 Larger Instruction Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1-4-4 Expanded Number of I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1-4-5 Wide Selection of Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1-4-6 Improved Interrupt Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1-4-7 SYSMAC NET Link and SYSMAC LINK Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1-4-8 Built-in RS-232C Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1-4-9 More Flexible PC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1-4-10 Debugging and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1-4-11 Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1-5 Comparisons Between C200HS and C200H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1-6 Compatibility of C200HS and C200H Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1
What is a Control System? Section 1-1

1-1 What is a Control System?

A Control System is the electronic equipment needed to control a particular
process. It may include everything from a process control computer, if one is
used, to the factory computer, down through the PCs (and there may be many of
them networked together) and then on down through the network to the control
components: the switches, stepping motors, solenoids, and sensors which
monitor and control the mechanical operations.

Process Control Computer

Factory Computer

PCs

PC PC PC

Control Components
A Control System can involve very large applications where many different mod-
els of PC are networked together or it could be an application as small as a single
PC controlling a single output device.

2
What is a Control System? Section 1-1

A Position Control System

Position Control Unit Input Unit

Signal line for PC

Servomotor
driver control

Hand-held Programming
Power Console
source

Control panel
Control switch

DC Servomotor
Power Driver
source

DC Servomotor

DC Servomotor Driver

DC Servomotor

In the typical Control System example shown above, a PC controls the move-
ment of the workpiece bed across two horizontal axes using Limit Switches and
Servomotors to monitor and control movement.

3
The Role of the PC Section 1-2

1-2 The Role of the PC

The Programmable Controller, or PC, is the part of the Control System that di-
rectly controls the manufacturing process. According to the program stored in its
memory, the PC accepts data from the input devices connected to it, and uses
this data to monitor the controlled system. When the program calls for some ac-
tion to take place, the PC sends data to the output devices connected to it, to
cause that action to take place. The PC may be used to control a simple, repeti-
tive task, or it may be connected to other PCs, or to a host computer in order to
integrate the control of a complex process.

1-2-1 Input Devices

PCs can receive input from either automated or manual devices. The PC could
receive data from the user via a pushbutton switch, keyboard, or similar device.
Automated input could come from a variety of devices: microswitches, timers,
encoders, photosensors, and so on. Some devices, like the Limit Switch shown
below, turn ON or OFF when the equipment actually makes contact with it. Other
devices, like the Photoelectric Switch and Proximity Switch shown below, use
other means, such as light or inductance, in order to get information about the
equipment being monitored.

Photoelectric switch Limit switch

Proximity switch

1-2-2 Output Devices

A PC can output to a myriad of devices for use in automated control. Almost any-
thing that you can think of could be controlled (perhaps indirectly) by a PC. Some
of the most common devices are motors, Solenoids, Servomotors, Stepping
Motors, valves, switches, indicator lights, buzzers, and alarms. Some of these
output devices; such as the motors, Solenoids, Servomotors, Stepping Motors,

4
How Does a PC Work? Section 1-3

and valves; affect the controlled system directly. Others; such as the indicator
lights, buzzers, and alarms; provide output to notify personnel.

Solenoid
Servomotor

Stepping motor

1-3 How Does a PC Work?

PCs operate by monitoring input signals and providing output signals. When
changes are detected in the signals, the PC reacts, through the user-pro-
grammed internal logic, to produce output signals. The PC continually scans the
program in its memory to achieve this control.
Block Diagram of PC

Power Supply

Memory

Signals Signals to
from Solenoids,
switches, Input Output motors,
CPU
sensors, etc.
etc.

Programming
Device

A program for your applications must be designed, and stored in the PC. This
program is then executed as part of the cycle of internal operations of the PC.

5
How Does a PC Work? Section 1-3

Cycle When a PC operates, that is, when it executes its program to control an external
system, a series of operations are performed inside the PC. These internal op-
erations can be broadly classified into the following four categories:
1, 2, 3... 1. Common (or overseeing) processes, such as watchdog timer operation and
testing the program memory.
2. Data input and output.
3. Instruction execution.
4. Peripheral device servicing.
Cycle Time The total time required for a PC to perform all these internal operations is called
the cycle time. The flowchart and diagram on the following page illustrate these
internal operations for a typical PC.
Timing is one of the most important factors in designing a Control System. For
accurate operations, it is necessary to have answers to such questions as these:
• How long does it take for the PC to execute all the instructions in its memory?
• How long does it take for the PC to produce a control output in response to a
given input signal?
The cycle time of the PC can be automatically calculated and monitored, but it is
necessary to have an understanding of the timing relationships within the PC for
effective system design and programming.

6
How Does a PC Work? Section 1-3

Flowchart of CPU Operation

Power application

Clears IR area and

resets all timers
Initialization on
power-up
Checks I/O Unit connections

Resets watchdog timer

Checks hardware and

Program Memory Overseeing
processes

NO
Check OK?

YES
Resets watchdog timer and
Sets error flags and turns program address counter
ON or flashes indicator
Program
execution
ALARM/ERROR Executes program
ALARM
(Flashing)
ERROR End of program?
(Solid ON) NO
YES
SCAN(18)
executed? NO
PC
YES Cycle time cycle
calculation time
Resets watchdog timer and waits
until the set cycle time has elapsed

Calculates cycle time

Resets watchdog timer

I/O refreshing

Refreshes input bits

and output signals

Services RS-232C RS-232C

connector connector
servicing

Services Host Link Units Host Link Unit

servicing

Peripheral
Services Peripheral devices device
servicing
SYSMAC LINK
Services SYSMAC LINK and and SYSMAC
SYSMAC NET Link Units NET Link Unit
servicing

7
New C200HS Features Section 1-4

1-4 New C200HS Features

The C200HS CPUs (C200HS-CPU01-E, C200HS-CPU01-EC, C200HS-
CPU03-E, C200HS-CPU21-E, C200HS-CPU23-E, C200HS-CPU31-E, and
C200HS-CPU33-E) have a number of new features that the C200H CPUs
lacked. The new C200HS features are described briefly in this section. The
C200HS-CPU01-E, C200HS-CPU01-EC, C200HS-CPU21-E, and C200HS-
CPU31-E use an AC power supply and the C200HS-CPU03-E, C200HS-
CPU23-E, and C200HS-CPU33-E use DC.
In addition, the C200HS-CPU21-E, C200HS-CPU23-E, C200HS-CPU31-E,
and C200HS-CPU33-E CPUs have an RS-232C connector. The C200HS-
CPU31-E and C200HS-CPU33-E CPUs support the SYSMAC NET Link Unit
and SYSMAC LINK Unit. The C200HS-CPU01-EC CPU and C200HS-
CPU03-E CPU with lot number jjZ5 (Dec. 1995) or later conform to EC direc-
tives. The C200HS-CPU21-EC CPU conforms to EC directives.

1-4-1 Improved Memory Capabilities

Internal Memory (UM) The C200HS CPUs come equipped with 16 KW of RAM in the PC itself, so a very
large memory capacity is available without purchasing a separate Memory Unit.
Furthermore, the program capacity has been increased to 15.2 KW.
Memory Cassettes Two types of Memory Cassettes are available for storage of data such as the
program. The PC can be set to transfer data from the Memory Cassette to UM
automatically when the PC is turned on.
Model Specifications
C200HS-ME16K 16-KW EEPROM
C200HS-MP16K 16-KW EPROM

Note C200H Memory Cassettes cannot be used in the C200HS.

Clock Function The C200HS CPUs have a built-in clock. It is not necessary to purchase a
Memory Unit equipped with a clock, as it was with the C200H-CPU21-E.
Increased SR and IR Areas The SR area has been increased substantially to provide more work words and
words dedicated to new instructions. The SR area now ranges from SR 236 to
SR 299. (The SR area ends at SR 255 in C200H CPUs.)
The number of operands and instruction execution time will be increased when
SR 256 to SR 299 are used in basic instructions.
I/O and work words previously ranged from 000 to 255. Words 256 to 511 have
been added for the C200HS.
Increased DM Area The Read/Write DM area has been increased substantially, too. It now ranges
from DM 0000 to DM 6143, compared to DM 0000 to DM 0999 in C200H CPUs.
The 6000 words from DM 0000 to DM 5999 are available for use in the program.
(DM 6000 to DM 6143 are used for the History Log and other functions.)
Fixed DM and Expansion The Fixed DM Area, used to store initializing data for Special I/O Units, has been
DM Areas decreased in size. It now contains the 512 words from DM 6144 to DM 6655,
compared to 1000 words (DM 1000 to DM 1999) in C200H CPUs.
In addition, up to 3000 words of UM can be allocated as expansion DM. Expan-
sion DM is allocated in 1000-word units in DM 7000 to DM 9999.
C200H data stored in words DM 1000 to DM 1999 can be used in C200HS PCs
by converting these 1000 words to ROM in the C200HS’s DM area (DM 7000 to
DM 7999) and then automatically transferring them to DM 1000 to DM 1999
when the C200HS is turned on.

8
New C200HS Features Section 1-4

1-4-2 Faster Execution Times

Instruction Execution Time Basic instructions in the C200HS are executed in as little as !@2 of the time re-
quired in the C200H. Other instructions are executed in just !@3 to !@8 of the time.

END Processing Time The time required for the cycle’s overhead processes depend on the system
configuration, but these processes are executed in about !@4 of the time required
in the C200H.

I/O Refreshing Time The I/O refreshing time has been reduced for all units, as shown in the following
table.
I/O Unit Time Required for Refreshing
Standard I/O Units !@3 of the C200H I/O refreshing time
Group-2 High-density I/O Units !@3 of the C200H I/O refreshing time
Special I/O Units $@5 of the C200H I/O refreshing time

1-4-3 Larger Instruction Set

Advanced programming is facilitated by the 225 special instructions available
with the C200HS-CPU01-E, C200HS-CPU01-EC, C200HS-CPU03-E,
C200HS-CPU21-E, C200HS-CPU21-EC, and C200HS-CPU23-E, or the 229
special instructions available with the C200HS-CPU31-E and C200HS-
CPU33-E. In addition, programming has been simplified by the addition of con-
venient instructions and macro functions. The new instructions and functions
are covered in detail in the C200HS Operation Manual (W235).

1-4-4 Expanded Number of I/O Points

Two Expansion I/O Racks can be connected to a CPU Rack to comprise a total of
three Racks. This allows for a total of 240 I/O points, for example, when 8-point
I/O Units are used, or 480 I/O points when 16-point I/O Units are used.
In addition, a Remote I/O System can provide a maximum of 800 points with
Slave Units or 512 points with Optical I/O Units.

1-4-5 Wide Selection of Special I/O Units

C200HS Systems can be configured in a variety of ways, using High-density I/O
Units, High-speed Counters, Position Control Units, Analog I/O Units, Tempera-
ture Sensor Units, ASCII Units, Voice Units, ID Sensor Units, Fuzzy Logic Units,
Cam Positioner Units, and so on.

1-4-6 Improved Interrupt Functions

Scheduled Interrupts The C200HS’s scheduled interrupt function has been improved so that the inter-
rupt interval can be set in 1 ms units rather than the 10 ms units in the C200H.
When the interrupt mode is set to C200HS mode, the interrupt response time is
only 1 ms max. (excluding the input ON/OFF delays). When a Communications
Unit is used with the C200HS-CPU31-E/CPU33-E CPU, the interrupt response
time is 10 ms max.

Input Interrupts Up to 8 interrupt subroutines can be executed by inputs to a C200HS-INT01 In-

terrupt Input Unit mounted to the C200HS. When the interrupt mode is set to
C200HS mode, the interrupt response time is only 1 ms max. (excluding the in-
put ON/OFF delays). When a Communications Unit is used with the C200HS-
CPU31-E/CPU33-E CPU, the interrupt response time is 10 ms max.

9
New C200HS Features Section 1-4

1-4-7 SYSMAC NET Link and SYSMAC LINK Capabilities

The SYSMAC NET Link and SYSMAC LINK Systems are high-speed FA net-
works which can be used with the C200HS-CPU31-E and C200HS-CPU33-E
CPUs and the following Units:
SYSMAC NET Link Unit: C200HS-SNT32
SYSMAC LINK Units: C200HW-SLK13/SLK14 (optical fiber cable)
C200HW-SLK23/SLK24 (coaxial cable)
Data can be exchanged with the PCs in a SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK
System using the SEND and RECV instructions.

1-4-8 Built-in RS-232C Connector

Host link communications are possible using the RS-232C connector built into
the C200HS-CPU21-E/CPU21-EC/CPU23-E/CPU31-E/CPU33-E CPU. By
using the TXD and RXD instructions, RS-232C communications is possible
without using time-consuming procedures. A 1-to-1 link using the LR Area or an
NT link with the Programmable Terminal (PT) allows high-speed communica-
tions.

1-4-9 More Flexible PC Settings

With its default settings, the C200HS can be used like a C200H PC, but the
C200HS’s new settings provide more flexibility and allow it to be adjusted to fit
particular applications. These new settings are described below.

DIP Switch Settings The 6 pins on the C200HS’s DIP switch are used to write-protect part of UM, set
the CPU to automatically transfer Memory Card data to UM, and other functions.

UM Area Allocation Portions of the UM area can be allocated for use as the Expansion DM Area and
I/O Comment Area. (Most of the UM area is used to store the ladder program.)

PC Setup DM 6600 to DM 6655 is set aside for PC Setup data. The PC Setup determines
many operating parameters, including the startup mode and initial Special I/O
Unit area.

1-4-10 Debugging and Maintenance

New functions such as data trace and differential monitor have been added,
making it easier to check status changes. These and other new functions are
covered in detail in the C200HS Operation Manual (W235).

1-4-11 Peripheral Devices

Peripheral Device With the C200H, Peripheral Devices had to be connected through a Peripheral
Connection Interface Unit or Host Link Unit, but with the C200HS Peripheral Devices can be
connected to the PC through a CQM1-CIF02 Connecting Cable.

I/O Comments Stored in PC By allocating a part of UM as the I/O Comment area, it is no longer necessary to
read I/O Comments from a Peripheral Device’s floppy disk. If the Peripheral De-
vice is connected to the C200HS online, the ladder diagram can be viewed with
I/O comments.

Online Editing A “CYCLE TIME OVER” error will no longer be generated when the program in
the PC itself is being edited online.

10
Comparisons Between C200HS and C200H Section 1-5

1-5 Comparisons Between C200HS and C200H

The following table outlines the main upgrades that have been made, and the
differences in functions and performance between the C200HS and the C200H.
Function Model
C200HS C200H
Memory
Built-in UM capacity RAM: 16K words None (Memory Unit used.)
(Program capacity: 15.2K words)
Optional memory Memory Cassette (backup, storage) Memory Unit (for loading, storing UM)
EEPROM C200HS-ME 16K (16K words) C200H-ME431/2 (4K words)
C200H-ME831/2 (8K words)
EPROM C200HS-MP 16K (16K words) C200H-MP831 (8K words)
RAM --- C200H-MR431/2/3 (4K words)
C200H-MR831/2/3 (8K words)
I/O memory
IR memory 3,296 bits (03000 to 23515) 3,296 bits (03000 to 23515)
3,392 bits (30000 to 51115)
SR memory 312 bits (23600 to 25507) 312 bits (23600 to 25507)
704 bits (25600 to 29915)
Data Memory
Normal DM 6,144 words (DM 0000 to DM 6143) 1,000 words (DM 0000 to DM 0999)
Fixed DM 512 words (DM 6144 to DM 6655) 1,000 words (DM 1000 to DM 1999)
Expansion DM 0 to 3,000 words (DM 7000 to DM ---
9999) Standard for CPU11-E/31-E. Included
Clock function Standard for all models. in Memory Unit for C200HS-
CPU21-E/22-E/23-E.
Execution time
Instruction execution time
Basic instructions 0.375 to 1.125 µs 0.75 to 2.25 µs
Special instructions Approx. 1/4 that of the C200H. 34 to 724 µs
Common processing time 0.7 ms 2.8 ms
(END processing time)
I/O refresh time
Basic I/O Approx. 1/3 that of the C200H. 0.04 to 0.07 ms/8 bits
High-density I/O (Group 2) Approx. 1/3 that of the C200H. 0.34 to 0.86 ms/Unit
Special I/O Approx. 4/5 that of the C200H. 0.8 to 6.5 ms/Unit
Instructions
Number of instructions 225 (229 for the CPU31-E/CPU33-E) 168 (172 for the CPU31-E)
Basic instructions 14 (SET/RSET added) 12
Special instructions 211 (215 for the CPU31-E/CPU33-E) 156 (160 for the CPU31-E)
Setting functions UM area arrangement ---
PC operation setting switch
Special instruction settings
PC Setup

11
Comparisons Between C200HS and C200H Section 1-5

Function Model
C200HS C200H
Interrupt function
Scheduled interrupts
Interrupt period 10 ms x SV or 1 ms x SV 10 ms x SV
Interrupt response time 10 ms max. (C200H common mode, 10 ms max.
Communications Unit connected)
1 ms (C200HS mode,
Communications Unit not connected)
Input interrupts 8 points max.
Interrupt Input Unit C200HS-INT01 (8 points) No interrupt input function
Backplane C200H-BCjj1-V2 (corresponding to C200H-BCjj1-V1 (Interrupt Input
Interrupt Input Unit) Unit not possible.)
Interrupt response time 1 ms max. (10 ms max. when
Communications Unit connected)
Debugging and maintenance Forced set/reset Forced set/reset
Data trace
Differential monitor
Programming Console operations Decimal display of binary data
Continuation of display when modes
are switched
Terminal mode and expansion Terminal mode
terminal mode
Peripheral Devices
Connection method Direct connection to C200HS. Connection via Peripheral Interface
Unit or Host Link Unit.
Cable for personal computer CQM1-CIF02
SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) C500-ZL3AT1-E C500-ZL3AT1-E
I/O comments Can be stored in C200HS
Online editing Cycle time over non-detection setting
possible.
Communications Units For C200HS-CPU31-E/CPU33-E
SYSMAC NET Link C200HS-SNT32 C200H-SNT31
SYSMAC LINK C200HW-SLK13/SLK14 (Optical) C200H-SLK11
C200HW-SLK23/SLK24 (Coaxial) C200H-SLK21-V1
Built-in Host Link RS-232C connector built into the ---
C200HS-CPU21-E/CPU21-EC/
CPU23-E/CPU31-E/CPU33-E
1-to-1 link LR Area is shared by connecting
RS-232C connectors.
NT link High-speed communications with
Programmable Terminal (PT) via
RS-232C connector.
Host Link Units
Added function Transmission possible by means of
TXD instruction.
Optical cable C200H-LK101-PV1 C200H-LK101-P
RS-232C C200H-LK201-V1 C200H-LK201
RS-422 C200H-LK202-V1 C200H-LK202

12
Compatibility of C200HS and C200H Devices Section 1-6

1-6 Compatibility of C200HS and C200H Devices

Completely compatible: C200H devices can be used with the C200HS as is.

Replacement Units: These Units were developed for the C200HS and can be
used for both the C200H and the C200HS.

C200HS only: These devices can only be used with the C200HS.

Classification Type of Unit Completely Replacement C200HS only Remarks

compatible Units
CPU Rack CPU Yes C200HS-CPU01-E/01-EC
/03-E/21-E/21-EC/23-E/
31-E/33-E
Backplane Yes C200H-BC031-V2/051-V2
/081-V2/101-V2 (Existing
Backplanes can be used
if Interrupt Input Units are
not used.)
Memory Cassette Yes C200HS-ME16K/MP16K
Expansion I/O Yes Configured based on
Rack Backplane and I/O Power
Supply Unit.
I/O Connecting Yes One cable is required to
Cable connect one Expansion
I/O Rack.
I/O Unit 8/12/16-pt. I/O Yes
Units
Standard B7A Yes 16 pts.
Interface Units
Group-2 Yes 32 pts. or 64 pts.
High-density I/O
Unit and Group-2
B7A Interface
Units
Special I/O Unit Yes High-speed Counters,
Position Control Units,
High-density I/O Units,
Analog I/O Units,
Temperature Sensor
Units, ASCII Units, etc.
Interrupt Unit Yes When mounting an
Interrupt Input Unit, use
the C200H-BCjj1-V2.
Remote I/O Master Unit Yes C200H-RM001-PV1
(O i l)
(Optical) Slave Unit Yes C200H-RT001-P/002-P
Remote I/O Master Unit Yes C200H-RM201
(Wi d)
(Wired) Slave Unit Yes C200H-RT201/201-C/202
Link Host Link Unit Yes C200H-LK101-PV1
C200H-LK201-V1
C200H-LK202-V1
PC Link Unit Yes C200H-LK401
SYSMAC LINK Yes C200HW-SLK13/SLK14
C200HW-SLK23/SLK24
SYSMAC NET Yes C200HS-SNT32
Link
Peripheral Programming Yes C200H-PRO27-E
Device
e ce Console CQM1-PRO01-E
SSS Yes C500-ZL3AT1-E

13
 SECTION 2
System Configuration and Unit Description
This section provides information about the Racks and individual Units that make up a C200HS PC System. The names of all
the parts of a Unit are given, followed by any details that apply to that Unit alone. For a description of how the Units fit together
to become a PC, refer to Section 3 Assembly Instructions. For information about the model numbers of any of the parts de-
scribed in this section, refer to Appendix A Standard Models. For specifications, refer to Appendix B Specifications.

2-1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2-1-1 CPU Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2-1-2 Expansion I/O Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2-1-3 Slave Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2-2 CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2-2-1 CPU Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2-2-2 CPU Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2-2-3 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2-2-4 DIP Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2-2-5 Peripheral Device Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2-2-6 Operation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2-2-7 Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2-3 Expansion I/O Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2-4 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2-5 I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2-5-1 Standard I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2-5-2 Group-2 High-density I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2-5-3 High-density I/O Units Classified as Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

15
System Configuration Section 2-1

2-1 System Configuration

A variety of system configurations can be achieved by using different combina-
tions of Racks and Units. Before ordering specific Units, carefully consider which
system configuration will best meet your control requirements. In a C200HS PC
System, a maximum of two Expansion I/O Racks and five Remote I/O Slave
Racks can be connected to a CPU Rack.

2-1-1 CPU Racks

A CPU Rack consists of the CPU, I/O Units, and other Units mounted to a CPU
Backplane. An example is shown below.
(8) (4) (3)

(1)

(2)

(10) (9) (6), (7) (5)

1. Backplane
There are backplanes available with 3, 5, 8, or 10 slots. The same back-
planes can be used for CPU Racks, Expansion I/O Racks, or Slave Racks.
2. CPU
There are eight CPU models available: CPU01-E, CPU01-EC, CPU03-E,
CPU21-E, CPU21-EC, CPU23-E, CPU31-E, and CPU33-E.
3. Battery and DIP Switch Compartment
An optional Memory Cassette can also be added here. EPROM and EE-
PROM Memory Cassettes are both available.
4. Standard I/O Unit
The Units can have 5, 8, 12, or 16 points. In this illustration the I/O Unit cover
is mounted. This is the terminal block cover for Units with 10P terminal
blocks.
5. Interrupt Input Unit
One Interrupt Input Unit can be used at the CPU Rack.
6. and 7. SYSMAC NET Link/SYSMAC LINK Unit, Host Link Unit, PC Link
Unit Remote I/O Master Unit
A maximum of two Units can be used of each of these Units, either
on the CPU Rack or on an Expansion I/O Rack.
SYSMAC NET Link/SYSMAC LINK Units can be mounted only to
C200HS-CPU31-E/CPU33-E CPUs. Bus Connection Units are re-
quired to connect to the CPU and a Power Supply Adapter/Auxiliary
Power Supply Unit must be mounted next to the Unit.
8. Standard I/O Unit
Terminal blocks have either 10 or 19 terminals. This is a 19P terminal block.
9. High-density I/O Unit (Group 2) or Group-2 B7A Interface Unit
A maximum of ten Units can be used if they are all 32-point Units, and five if
they are all 64-point Units. They cannot be used on Slave Racks.
10. Special I/O Unit
Up to ten Special I/O Units can be used (including PC Link). They can be
used on any Rack.

16
System Configuration Section 2-1

2-1-2 Expansion I/O Racks

An Expansion I/O Rack consists of an I/O Power Supply Unit and I/O Units
mounted to a Backplane. A maximum of two Expansion I/O Racks can be con-
nected. The same Expansion I/O Racks can be connected to either C200H or
C200HS CPU Racks via an I/O Connecting Cable.

(2)

(3) (1)

1. I/O Power Supply Unit

2. Backplane
There are backplanes available with 3, 5, 8, or 10 slots. The same back-
planes can be used for CPU Racks, Expansion I/O Racks, or Slave Racks.
3. I/O Connecting Cable
There are five types of cable, from 30 cm to 10 m. A maximum total of 12 m
can be used.

2-1-3 Slave Racks

A Slave Rack consists of an Remote I/O Slave Unit and I/O Units mounted to a
Backplane. A maximum of five Slave Racks can be connected. Slave Racks are
connected via either optical or wire cables to a Remote I/O Master Unit mounted
to the CPU Rack.

(2) (1)

1. Slave Unit
Either Optical or Wired Slaves can be used.
2. Fiber-optic Cable

17
CPUs Section 2-2

2-2 CPUs
There are two groups of CPUs available, one that uses an AC power supply, and
one that uses a DC power supply. Select one of the models shown below accord-
ing to requirements of your control system.
CPU model Power supply voltage
C200HS-CPU01-E/CPU01-EC/CPU21-E 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC
/CPU21-EC/CPU31-E (voltage selector)
C200HS-CPU03-E/CPU23-E/CPU33-E 24 VDC

The CPU21-E, CPU23-E, CPU31-E, and CPU33-E CPUs have an RS-232C

connector. The CPU31-E and CPU33-E CPUs support the SYSMAC NET Link
Unit and SYSMAC LINK Unit. The C200HS-CPU01-EC CPU and C200HS-
CPU03-E CPU with lot number jjZ5 (Dec. 1995) or later conform to EC direc-
tives. The C200HS-CPU21-EC CPU conforms to EC directives.

! Caution Be sure to check the power supply used by the CPU. Absolutely do not apply an
AC power supply to a DC-type CPU.

2-2-1 CPU Components

C200HS-CPU01-E/CPU01-EC/CPU03-E
Power fuse (MF51NR, 5.2 dia. x 20 mm):
Indicators C200HS-CPU01-E/CPU01-EC: 2 A, 250 V
C200HS-CPU03-E: 5 A, 125 V

Removable terminal block

Battery/Switch compartment:
The backup lithium battery (C200H-BAT09)
and the DIP switch for setting C200HS opera- Cable connector for peripheral devices
tions are contained. An optional Memory Cas- (Peripheral device connector)
sette can also be mounted.

18
CPUs Section 2-2

C200HS-CPU21-E/CPU21-EC/CPU23-E/CPU31-E/CPU33-E

Power fuse (MF51NR, 5.2 dia. x 20 mm):

Indicators C200HS-CPU21-E/CPU21-EC/CPU31-E:
2 A, 250 V
C200HS-CPU23-E/CPU33-E: 5 A, 125 V

Memory Casette compartment

Bus connector:
Available only with the CPU31-E Removable terminal block
and CPU33-E. Use this connector
when SYSMAC NET Link Unit or
SYSMAC LINK Unit is used.

RS-232C Cable connector for

connector peripheral devices
Battery/Switch compartment

2-2-2 CPU Indicators

The following table shows the indicators that are located on the front panel of the
CPUs.

COMM1 (orange) (Note “COMM” on CPU01-E/CPU01-EC/CPU03-E):

Lights when a peripheral device is in operation.

COMM2 (orange):
Available only with the CPU21-E, CPU21-EC, CPU23-E, CPU31-E,
RUN (green): and CPU33-E. Lights when the CPU is communicating via the
Lights when the PC is RS-232C connector.
POWER (green):
operating normally.
Lights when power is
supplied to the CPU.

COMM 1
COMM 2

OUT INHIBIT (red):

Lights when the Load OFF
flag (SR bit 25215) turns ON,
ALM (blinking red): at which time all the outputs
Blinks if an error occurs that are turned OFF.
does not stop the CPU.

ERR (solid red):

Lights if an error occurs that stops the
CPU, at which time the RUN indicator
turns OFF and the outputs are turned
OFF.

19
CPUs Section 2-2

2-2-3 Power Supply

AC Power Supplies: C200HS-CPU01-E/CPU21-E/CPU31-E

Power fuse:
2 A, 250 V
(5.2-dia. x 20) MF51NR

AC Input: Connect to 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC.

Terminals Voltage selector terminals

for exter- Short: 100 to 120 VAC
nal con- Open: 200 to 240 VAC
nections LG: Ground to 100 Ω or less to increase noise resistance
and protect against shock.
GR: Ground to 100 Ω or less to protect against shock.
+ 24 VDC, 0.3 A output: Use to supply power to DC
Input Units

RUN output: ON when PC is operating.

C200HS-CPU01-EC/CPU21-EC
Conforms to EC directives.

Power fuse:
2 A, 250 V
(5.2-dia. x 20) MF51NR

AC Input: Connect to 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC.

Terminals Voltage selector terminals

for exter- Short: 100 to 120 VAC
nal con- Open: 200 to 240 VAC
nections NC

GR: Ground to 100 Ω or less to protect against shock.

+ 24 VDC, 0.3 A output: Use to supply power to DC
Input Units

RUN output: ON when PC is operating.

20
CPUs Section 2-2

DC Power Supplies: C200HS-CPU23-E/CPU33-E

Power fuse:
5 A, 125 V
(5.2-dia. x 20) MF51NR

+
24 VDC input: Connect to 24 VDC.

Terminals NC
for exter- NC
nal con-
nections LG: Ground to 100 Ω or less to increase noise resistance
and protect against shock.
GR: Ground to 100 Ω or less to protect against shock.
NC
NC

RUN output: ON when PC is operating.

C200HS-CPU03-E
CPUs with lot numbers jjZ5 (Dec. 1995) or later conform to EC directives.

Power fuse:
5 A, 125 V
(5.2-dia. x 20) MF51NR

+
24 VDC input: Connect to 24 VDC. (See note below)

Terminals NC
for exter- NC
nal con-
nections Ground to 100 Ω or less to increase noise resistance and
protect against shock.
Ground to 100 Ω or less to protect against shock.
NC
NC

RUN output: ON when PC is operating. (See note below)

Note Use a 24-VDC power supply with reinforced insulation or double insulation if the
EC directives (low-voltage directives) must be satisfied.

21
CPUs Section 2-2

2-2-4 DIP Switch

All the DIP switch settings are factory-set to OFF. Set them as required depend-
ing on the use.
Pin no. Item Setting Function
1 Memory protect ON Program Memory and read-only DM (DM 6144 to DM 6655)
data cannot be overwritten from a Peripheral Device.
OFF Program Memory and read-only DM (DM 6144 to DM 6655)
data can be overwritten from a Peripheral Device.
2 Automatic transfer of Memory ON The contents of the Memory Cassette will be automatically
Cassette
Casse contents
e co e s (see note
o e 1)) transferred to the internal RAM at start-up.
OFF The contents will not be automatically transferred.
3 Message
g language
g g ON Programming Console messages will be displayed in English.
OFF Programming Console messages will be displayed in
Japanese.
4 Expansion instruction setting ON Expansion instructions set by user. Normally ON when using a
host computer for programming/monitoring.
OFF Expansion instructions set to defaults.
5 Communications conditions (see ON Standard communications parameters (see note) will be set for
note 2) the following serial communications ports.
• Built-in RS-232C port
• Peripheral port (only when a connecting cable for a personal
computer (for example, the CQM1-CIF01/-CIF02 Cable) is
connected)
Note 1. Standard communications parameters are as follows:
Serial communications mode: Host Link or peripheral
bus; start bits: 1; data length: 7 bits; parity: even; stop
bits: 2; baud rate: 9,600 bps
2. The CX-Programmer running on a personal computer
can be connected to the peripheral port via the periph-
eral bus using the above standard communications
parameters.
OFF The communications parameters for the following serial
communications ports will be set in PC Setup as follows:
• Built-in RS-232C port: DM 6645 and DM 6646
• Peripheral port: DM 6650 and DM 6651
Note When the CX-Programmer is connected to the peripheral
port with the peripheral bus, either set bits 00 to 03 of DM
6650 to 0 Hex (for standard parameters), or set bits 12 to
15 of DM 6650 to 0 Hex and bits 00 to 03 of DM 6650 to 1
Hex (for Host Link or peripheral bus) separately.
6 Expansion TERMINAL mode ON Expansion TERMINAL mode (when AR 0709 is ON);
setting
se g AR 0712: ON
OFF Normal mode; AR 0712: OFF

Note 1. The Memory Cassette is optional.

2. The values shown in the above table for the ON status of the communica-
tions conditions apply to CPUs with the lot number “jj75” (July 1995) or
those manufactured afterward. The values for CPUs with the lot number
“jj65” (June 1995) or those manufactured before then are as follows; stop
bit: 1 and baud rate: 2,400 bps.

2-2-5 Peripheral Device Connector

A Programming Console (C200H-PRO27-E or CQM1-PRO01-E) or IBM PC/AT
running LSS can be used to program and monitor the C200HS PCs. They can be
connected by opening the cover and connecting a cable to the peripheral device
connector.

22
CPUs Section 2-2

Use the following cables to connect the respective Peripheral Devices.

Programming Console: C200H-CN222/CN422
C200HS-CN222/CN422
(Conforms to EC directives)
IBM PC/AT: CQM1-CIF02
(The C200H-CN222 Connecting Cable is included with the CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming Console.)

Note Peripheral Devices can be mounted directly to C200H PCs, but not to C200HS
PCs.

2-2-6 Operation Modes

The operation modes when the C200HS is powered up are shown in the table
below. If a Peripheral Device is connected when the C200HS power is already
on, the mode status prior to connecting the Peripheral Device will be retained.

PC Setup (DM 6600) status Peripheral Device connected C200HS mode at power up
Mode according
g to status of None Automatically goes into RUN mode.
P
Programming
i Console
C l keys
k Programming Console Goes into mode set by Programming
(DM 6600 = 0000) Console selector switch.
Device other than Programming Automatically goes into PROGRAM
Console mode.
Mode retained from before p
power None Goes into mode that was in effect
i
interruption
i Programming Console prior
i to power interruption.
i i
(DM 6600 = 0100)
Device other than Programming
Console
Mode according
g to PC Setup
p None Goes into mode set by y PC Setup
p ((bits
DM 6600 = 0200:
0200 PROGRAM Programming Console 00 to 07 off DM 6600).
6600)
DM 6600 = 0201: MONITOR
DM 6600 = 0202: RUN Device other than Programming
Console

2-2-7 Memory Cassettes

The C200HS comes equipped with a built-in RAM for the user’s program, so a
normal program be created even without installing a Memory Cassette. An op-
tional Memory Cassette, however, can provide greater speed and flexibility.
There are two types of Memory Cassette available, each with a capacity of 16K
words. For instructions on installing Memory Cassettes, refer to Section 3 Instal-
lation.
The following table shows the Memory Cassettes which can be used with the
C200HS PCs. These Memory Cassettes cannot be used in C200H PCs.

Memory Capacity Model number Comments

EEPROM 16K words C200HS-ME16K ---
EPROM 16K words C200HS-MP16K The ROM chip is not included with
the Memory Cassette; it must be
purchased separately.

Note Memory Cassettes for the C200HS cannot be used with the C200H, and
Memory Units for the C200H cannot be used with the C200HS.

C200HS-ME16K (EEPROM) When a Memory Cassette is installed in the CPU, reading and writing of the
user memory (UM) and I/O data is made possible. There is no need for a

23
Expansion I/O Racks Section 2-3

backup power supply. The Memory Cassette can be removed from the CPU
and used for storing data.

C200HS-MP16K (EPROM) The program is written using a PROM Writer. The ROM is mounted to the
Memory Casette and then installed in the CPU. I/O data cannot be stored.

Notch

2-3 Expansion I/O Racks

The Backplane used to construct a CPU Rack is also used to construct an Ex-
pansion I/O Rack. An Expansion I/O Rack is identical to a CPU Rack, except the
CPU is replaced with a Power Supply. Two Expansion I/O Racks can be con-
nected to a CPU Rack. The number of I/O Units and Special I/O Units that can be
connected to an Expansion I/O Rack is determined by the number of slots on the
Rack.

24
Power Supply Unit Section 2-4

The parts of an Expansion I/O Rack are shown in the following diagram.

I/O Connecting Cable Connector:

Connects Expansion I/O Rack to pre-
ceding Expansion I/O Rack or to CPU.
Backplane Power Supply

I/O Connecting Cable Connector: I/O Units

Connects Expansion I/O Rack to
Backplane mounting screws
next Expansion I/O Rack.
(four, with 4-mm dia. heads)
When not used, cover with a cap.

2-4 Power Supply Unit

The Power Supply used for Expansion I/O Racks is available in three models.
Two run on 100 to 120 or 200 to 240 VAC, and the other runs on 24 VDC. Also,
one of the AC Power Supply Units conforms to EC directives. Be very careful not
to provide an AC power supply to a DC-type Unit.
AC Power Supply Unit: C200H-PS221

POWER indicator (green): Power fuse:

Lights when power is 2 A, 250 V
supplied to Power Supply (5.2-dia. x 20) MF51NR

AC Input

Terminals Voltage selector terminals

for exter- Short: 100 to 120 VAC
nal con- Open: 200 to 240 VAC
nections
LG
GR
+ 24 VDC, 0.3
A output

NC
NC

25
I/O Units Section 2-5

C200H-PS221-C
Conforms to EC directives.
POWER indicator (green): Power fuse:
Lights when power is 2 A, 250 V
supplied to Power Supply (5.2-dia. x 20) MF51NR

AC Input

Terminals Voltage selector terminals

for exter- Short: 100 to 120 VAC
nal con- Open: 200 to 240 VAC
nections NC

+ 24 VDC, 0.3
A output

NC
NC

DC Power Supply Unit C200H-PS211

Units with lot numbers jjZ5 (Dec. 1995) or later conform to EC directives.
POWER indicator (green): Power fuse:
Lights when power is 5 A, 125 V
supplied to Power Supply (5.2-dia. x 20) MF51NR

+
24 VDC

Terminals NC
for exter- NC
nal con-
nections

NC
NC
NC
NC

2-5 I/O Units

I/O Units are divided into three groups based on the way that I/O words they use
are allocated. Standard I/O Units are allocated I/O words according to the Unit’s

26
I/O Units Section 2-5

location on the CPU or Expansion I/O Rack. Group-2 High-density I/O Units are
allocated I/O words according to I/O number set on each Unit. High-density I/O
Units classified as Special I/O Unit are allocated I/O words according to the unit
number set on each Unit.

2-5-1 Standard I/O Units

Standard I/O Units come in three shapes; A-shape, B-shape, and E-shape. Re-
fer to Appendix B Specifications for the dimensions of each Unit.
A-shape I/O Unit (10-terminal Terminal Block)
I/O Unit lock notch

Nameplate

I/O indicators:
Indicate ON/
OFF status of
points

10-terminal terminal block

B-shape I/O Unit (19-terminal Terminal Block)

I/O Unit lock notch

Nameplate

I/O indicators:
Indicate ON/
OFF status of
points

19-terminal terminal block

Note The C200H-OC226 is an extended B-shape I/O Unit and its dimensions are dif-
ferent from those of the Unit shown above.

27
I/O Units Section 2-5

E-shape I/O Unit (10-terminal Terminal Block)

I/O Unit lock notch

Nameplate

I/O indicators
Indicate ON/
OFF status of
points

10-terminal terminal block

2-5-2 Group-2 High-density I/O Units

Group-2 High-density I/O Units come in two varieties; C-shape and D-shape.
The shape of the two varieties is the same, but C-shape Units have only one con-
nector, while the D-shape Units have two. C-shape Units have 32 I/O points and
D-shape Units have 64 I/O points.
Unit Specifications Shape Model
DC Input
p Unit 12 VDC; 64 pts D C200H-ID111
24 VDC; 32 pts C C200H-ID216
C200H-ID218
24 VDC;; 64 p
pts D C200H-ID217
C200H-ID219
Transistor Output Unit 4.5 VDC,16 mA to C C200H-OD218
26.4 VDC,100 mA; 32 pts
4.5 VDC,16
, mA to D C200H-OD219
26 4 VDC,100
26.4 VDC 100 mA;
A 64 pts C200H-OD21B

Note Refer to Optional Products, Appendix A Standard Models for a list of external
connectors.
Group-2 High-density I/O Units are allocated I/O words in the IR Area (IR 030 to
IR 049) by setting the I/O number switch on the front of each Unit. C-shape Units
are allocated 2 words and D-shape Units are allocated 4 words beginning with
m, where m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number.
For C-shape Units the 16 I/O bits in m are allocated to the A side of the connector,
and the I/O bits in m+1 are allocated to the B side of the connector. For D-shape
Units the I/O bits in m are allocated to the A side of connector 1, the I/O bits in
m+1 are allocated to the B side of connector 1, the I/O bits in m+2 are allocated to
the A side of connector 2, the I/O bits in m+3 are allocated to the B side of con-
nector 2. Refer to the C200HS Operation Manual (W235) for more details on I/O
word allocation.

28
I/O Units Section 2-5

Always turn the PC power off before changing a Unit’s I/O number. The new I/O
number will not be recognized unless the PC has been turned off. Do not set
more than one Unit to the same I/O number or set I/O numbers so that the same
I/O word is allocated to more than one Unit, e.g., if you set a 64-point Unit to I/O
number 0, you cannot use I/O number 1 for any Unit.
Refer to Appendix B Specifications for the specifications and dimensions of the
Units.

C-shape Units (32-point Units)

I/O Unit lock notch

Nameplate

I/O indicators:
Indicate ON/OFF status of points
I/O number setting switch

40-pin connector

D-shape Units (64-point Units)

I/O Unit lock notch

Nameplate
I/O indicators:
Indicate ON/OFF status of I/O points
I/O number setting switch

Indicator switch:
Determines whether the status of
connector 1 or connector 2 I/O points
are indicated by the I/O indicators.

40-pin connectors

29
I/O Units Section 2-5

2-5-3 High-density I/O Units Classified as Special I/O Units

Some High-density I/O Units are classified as Special I/O Units. Up to 10 Special
I/O Units can be connected to a PC. The Units have two 24-pin connectors. In
general, these Units control 32 I/O points, although some Units can control 128
I/O points when set for dynamic operation.
Refer to Appendix B Specifications for detailed specifications and dimensions of
the Units.

Unit Specifications Model Number Remarks

TTL Input Unit 5 VDC, 32 inputs C200H-ID501 8 pts can be set as high-speed inputs.
DC Input Unit 24 VDC; 32 inputs C200H-ID215
TTL Output Unit 5 VDC, 32 outputs C200H-OD501 Can be set for 128 dynamic outputs.
Transistor Output Unit 24 VDC; 32 outputs C200H-OD215
TTL I/O Unit 5 VDC, 16 inputs, 16 outputs C200H-MD501 8 pts
p can be set as high-speed
g p inputs.
p
DC Input/Transistor
p 12 VDC; 16 inputs, 16 outputs C200H-MD115 Can be set for 128 dynamic inputs.
O
Output U
Uniti 24 VDC; 16 inputs, 16 outputs C200H-MD215

Note Refer to Optional Products, Appendix A Standard Models for a list of external
connectors.

Setting the Unit Number High-density I/O Units are each allocated 10 I/O words in the IR Area (IR 100 to
IR 199) by setting the unit number switch on the front of each Unit. The 10 words
begin with n, where n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number. For example, a Special I/O
Unit with a unit number of 3 would be allocated IR 130 to IR 139.
Always turn the PC power off before changing a Unit’s unit number. The new unit
number (0 to 9) will not be recognized unless the PC has been turned off.

Setting the DIP Switch The operation of High-density I/O Units is controlled by setting the pins of the
DIP switch on the back panel. The following table shows the function of each pin
and applicable Units.

Pin Function Applicable

pp Units Setting
ON OFF
1 Operating mode C200H-OD501/OD215 128 dynamic outputs 32 outputs
C200H-MD501/MD115/MD215 128 dynamic inputs 16 inputs, 16 outputs
2 High-speed input1 C200H-ID501/ID215 Inputs 08 to 15 of CN2 Normal inputs
are high-speed inputs.
C200H-MD501/MD115/MD215 Inputs 08 to 15 of CN2 Normal inputs
are high-speed inputs.
3 High-speed input C200H-ID501/ID215 4 ms 1 ms
minimum pulse width2 C200H-MD501/MD115/MD215
4 Input response time3 C200H-ID501/ID215 15 ms max. 2.5 ms max.
C200H-MD501/MD115/MD215
5 Data output mode4 C200H-OD501/OD215 Positive logic Negative logic
6 Not used. --- --- ---

Note 1. Used in the C200H-MD501/MD115/MD215 only when pin 1 is OFF, setting

the Unit to static mode.
2. Used in the C200H-ID501/215, C200H-MD501/MD215/MD115/MD215
only when pin 2 is ON, setting the Unit to High-speed input mode.
3. Sets the input response time for normal inputs. When pin 2 is ON, CN2 08 to
15 are pulse-catch inputs. Other inputs can be used as normal inputs.

30
I/O Units Section 2-5

4. Used when pin 1 is ON, setting the C200H-OD501/OD215 to dynamic out-

put mode.

I/O Unit lock notch

Nameplate

I/O indicators:
Indicate ON/OFF status of points

Unit number setting switch

24-pin connectors

31
 SECTION 3
Installation
The term “PC” can refer to a single object, but actually even the simplest PCs are usually composed of several different de-
vices. In fact a PC can be physically spread throughout a building and still be called a single PC. This section describes how to
install a PC System, including mounting the various Units and configuring the System. Be sure to follow the instructions
carefully during installing. Improper installation can cause the PC to malfunction, resulting in extreme danger.

3-1 Installation Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

3-2 Mounting Units to the Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3-3 Installing Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3-4 I/O Connecting Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3-5 Mounting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3-6 Installing Memory Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

33
Installation Environment Section 3-1

3-1 Installation Environment

This section details the necessary environmental conditions for installing the
PC.

! Caution Static electricity can damage PC components. Your body can carry an electro-
static charge, especially when the humidity is low. Before touching the PC, be
sure to first touch a grounded metallic object, such as a metal water pipe, in order
to discharge any static build-up.

Ambient Conditions Do not install the PC in any of the following locations. Doing so will affect PC life
and may affect operating performance.
• Locations subject to ambient temperatures lower than 0°C or higher than
55°C, or 0°C to 45°C when a Programming Console is used.
• Locations subject to drastic temperature changes or condensation.
• Locations subject to ambient humidity lower than 10% or higher than 90%.
• Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Locations subject to excessive dust (especially iron dust) or chloride.
• Locations that would subject the CPU to direct shock or vibration.
• Locations that would subject the PC to water, oil, or chemical reagents.
• Locations exposed to direct sunlight.

Cooling There are two points to consider in order to ensure that the PC does not over-
heat. The first is the clearance between the Racks, and the second is installation
of a cooling fan.

Clearance between Racks The Racks need to have sufficient room between each other to allow for I/O wir-
ing, and additional room to ensure that the I/O wiring does not hamper cooling.
The Racks must also be mounted so that the total length of the Connecting
Cable between all Racks in a given series does not exceed 12 m. As a general
rule, about 70 to 120 mm should be left between any two Racks. Consider fac-
tors such as the width of the wiring duct, wiring length, ventilation, and ease of
access to Units, when determining the spacing between Racks. Greater space
is required between Racks when using certain CPU Bus and Special I/O Units.
Refer to the operation manuals for the Units you are using for details.

Cooling Fan A cooling fan is not always necessary, but may be needed in some installations.
Try to avoid mounting the PC in a warm area or over a source of heat. A cooling
fan is needed if the ambient temperature may become higher than that speci-
fied. If the PC is mounted in an enclosure, install a cooling fan, as shown in the
following diagram, to maintain the ambient temperature within specifications.

Fan

PC

Louver

34
Mounting Units to the Backplane Section 3-2

Noise Do not mount the PC in a control panel in which high-power equipment is

installed, or near high heat-producing devices such as heaters, transformers, or
large-capacity resistors. To avoid noise, make sure the point of installation is at
least 200 mm away from power lines as shown in the following diagram. Ensure
that the plate to which the PC is mounted is grounded.
Power lines

200 mm min.

PC

200 mm min.

3-2 Mounting Units to the Backplane

There is no single Unit that can be said to constitute a Rack PC. To build a Rack
PC, we start with a Backplane. The C200H Backplane (used for the C200HS
PC) is shown below.

C200H Backplane

The Backplane is a simple device having two functions. The first is to provide
physical support for the Units to be mounted to it. The second is to provide the
connectors and electrical pathways necessary for connecting the Units
mounted to it.
The core of the PC is the CPU. The CPU contains the program consisting of the
series of steps necessary for the control task. The CPU has a built-in power sup-
ply, and fits into the rightmost position of the Backplane.

35
Mounting Units to the Backplane Section 3-2

The CPU of the C200HS has no I/O points built in. So, in order to complete the
PC it is necessary to mount one or more I/O Units to the Backplane. Mount the
I/O Unit to the Backplane by locking the top of the I/O Unit into the slot on the
Backplane and rotating the I/O Unit downwards as shown in the following dia-
gram.

Hook

Backplane

Lock lever

Press down on the yellow lock lever at the bottom of the slot, press the I/O Unit
firmly into position, and then release the yellow lock lever.

(To remove a Unit, hold down the lock lever with an implement such as a screw-
driver.)

36
Mounting Units to the Backplane Section 3-2

CPUs, I/O Power Supply Units and Slave Units must have two screws on the
bottom tightened with a Phillips screwdriver. The screwdriver must be held at a
slight angle, so be sure to leave enough space below each Rack.

Duct
20 mm min.

CPU
Phillips
screwdriver Backplane
I/O Power
Supply Unit

Remote
I/O Rack
20 mm min.
Duct

The mounting height of CPU Racks, Expansion I/O Racks, or Slave Racks is
118 mm or 143 mm depending on the type of I/O Units mounted. If Peripheral
Devices or connection cables are attached, the additional dimensions must be
taken into account. Allow sufficient clearance in the control panel in which the
PC is mounted.

D
C

CPU D (mm) C (mm)

C200HS-CPU01-E/CPU01-EC 118 Approx. 180 to 200
/CPU03-E
C200HS-CPU21-E/CPU21-EC 143 Approx. 200 to 220
/CPU23-E/CPU31-E/CPU33-E

The figure below shows one I/O Unit mounted directly to the left of the CPU.

I/O Units are where the control connections are made from the PC to all the vari-
ous input devices and output devices. As you can see from the figure above,

37
Mounting Units to the Backplane Section 3-2

there is still some space available on the left side of the Backplane. This space is
for any additional I/O Units that may be required.

The figure above shows a total of eight I/O Units mounted to the Backplane.
When using 16-point Output Units (models C200H-OC225/OD212/OD21A)
mount them to a C200H-BCjj1-V1/V2 Backplane. If a Backplane other than
this model is used, the Units will not operate properly.
Interrupt Input Units must be mounted to a C200H-BCjj1-V2 Backplane to op-
erate properly. Only one Interrupt Input Unit can be mounted per PC.
Backplanes are available in different lengths (three, five, eight, ten slots), and
can hold a different number of I/O Units accordingly (refer to Appendix B Specifi-
cations for dimensions). Of course, not all I/O Units look exactly alike, but the
ones in the figure show their typical appearance. This configuration of Back-
plane, CPU, and I/O Units is called a CPU Rack. This term refers to the Back-
plane and all the Units mounted to it. However, if we want to include more than
eight I/O Units in our configuration we can add an additional Backplane.
This Backplane has I/O Units mounted to it, but it has no CPU of its own. The
additional Backplane must also have an Expansion I/O Power Supply mounted
to its rightmost position. This configuration of additional Backplane, Expansion
I/O Power Supply, and I/O Units is called an Expansion I/O Rack.

The CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Rack shown above are connected by a Con-
necting Cable (the length of Cable between individual Racks can be up to 10 m,
but the total length of Cable between all Racks must be within 12 m).
Remember that this whole configuration is still referred to as one PC. It is possi-
ble to add up to two Expansion I/O Racks and five Remote I/O Slave Racks to
one CPU Rack. When installing I/O Connecting Cables, cover any unused con-
nectors with the caps provided.

38
Installing Racks Section 3-3

3-3 Installing Racks

The following figures show two side views, each consisting of a mounted CPU
and two Expansion I/O Racks. Provide a space of 20 mm minimum on the upper
and lower sides of each duct for ventilation and Unit replacement purposes.
C200HS- C200HS-CPU21-E/CPU21-EC/
CPU01-E/CPU01-EC/ CPU23-E/CPU31-E/CPU33-E
CPU03-E
118 mm 143 mm

CPU CPU

30 mm Duct 30 mm Duct
30 mm

I/O I/O

40 mm 30 mm Duct 30 mm Duct

I/O I/O

Each Rack must be mounted vertically, that is, with the printing on the front pan-
els oriented as it would normally read. Racks may be directly mounted to any
sturdy support meeting the environmental specifications.
Whenever possible, use wiring conduit to hold the I/O wiring. Standard wiring
conduit should be used, and it should be long enough to completely contain the
I/O wiring and keep it separated from other cables.

! Caution Racks must be mounted horizontally so that the Units are upright (i.e., not upside
down or lying on their backs).

39
I/O Connecting Cable Section 3-4

The duct work shown in the following diagram is not used for mounting the
Racks. Although optional, this duct work can be used to house the wires from the
I/O Units that run along the sides of the Racks, keeping the wires from becoming
entangled. This figure illustrates the correct way to mount the Racks.

Input duct Output duct Power duct

200 mm min.

CPU
Rack Breakers,
fuses

I/O Connecting Cable

Expansion
I/O Rack

Power
equipment
such as
transform-
ers and
magnetic
relays

Fuses, relays, tim-

ers, etc. (NOT
heat-generating Terminal blocks Terminal blocks for
equipment, power for PC power equipment
equipment, etc.)

3-4 I/O Connecting Cable

Up to 10 meters of I/O connecting cable can be used in one place only, and the
maximum total length of connecting cable that can be used is 12 meters. Do not
place I/O connecting cable in the same ducts used for I/O lines and power lines.
Insert the cable firmly in the CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Rack connectors, and
be sure to secure it by firmly tightening the two screws.

! Caution If an I/O connecting cable connector comes loose, an I/O bus error will be gener-
ated and operation will stop.

If I/O connecting cable is to be passed through a hole, a diameter of at least

53 mm is required. If the upper cover is removed, it can be passed through a hole
with a diameter of 33 mm or larger. Then, at the time of installation, put it back
together and be sure to fasten the screws.
The tensile strength of the cable is 4.9 N (5 kgf). Do not subject the cable to a
force greater than that.

40
Mounting Requirements Section 3-5

3-5 Mounting Requirements

Each Rack must be mounted vertically, that is with the printing on the front pan-
els oriented as it would normally be read. The Racks should be mounted one
above the other with the CPU Rack uppermost as shown below.

CPU Rack

These connectors
are not used.
Cover them with Expansion Rack
caps.

Expansion Rack

The C200HS is approved by Underwriters Laboratories under the condition that,

“The device must be mounted vertically for ventilation purposes.”

DIN Track Mounting The PC may be mounted using DIN track if desired. This type of mounting is not
required, and the PC may be directly mounted to any sturdy support meeting the
environmental specifications (refer to Appendix B Specifications). If you want to
mount the PC on DIN track, you can order a DIN Track from OMRON (refer to
Appendix B Standard Models). DIN Tracks come in the two heights shown be-
low.

7.3-mm Height

16-mm Height

41
Mounting Requirements Section 3-5

DIN Track Mounting Bracket The DIN Track Mounting Bracket shown below is necessary for mounting the PC
to the DIN Track.

Item Specification Model

DIN Track Mounting Bracket One set (two brackets) C200H-DIN01
DIN 50 cm long, 7.3 mm high PFP-50N
1 m long, 7.3 mm high PFP-100N
1 m long, 16 mm high PFP-100N2

Procedure
1, 2, 3... 1. The following diagram is a view of the back of the Backplane. Attach one
Mounting Bracket to the left and right sides of the Backplane as shown be-
low.

Backplane

DIN Track Mounting

Bracket
There are two Back-
plane mounting
screws each on the
left and right sides of
the Backplane. Use
these screws to at-
tach the DIN Track
Mounting Brackets to
the Backplane.

2. Mount the Backplane to the DIN Track so that the claws on the Mounting
Brackets fit into the upper portion of the DIN Track as shown below.

This claw fits into the DIN Track DIN Track

Backplane
DIN Track Mounting Bracket

42
Installing Memory Cassettes Section 3-6

3. Loosen the screws attaching the Mounting Brackets to the Backplane. Slide
the Backplane upward as shown below so that the Mounting Bracket and
Backplane clamp securely onto the DIN Track. Tighten the screws.

23

DIN Track Mounting Bracket

DIN Track

Hold-down bracket
Projections Slide this screw to the top of the
projection and then tighten it.

3-6 Installing Memory Cassettes

An optional Memory Cassette can be installed in the C200HS. (The C200H
Memory Unit cannot be used with the C200HS.) The two types of Memory Cas-
settes are described in 2-2-6 Memory Cassettes. To install a Memory Cassette,
follow the procedure outlined below.

! Caution Be careful to always turn the power off before inserting or removing a Memory
Cassette. If a Memory Cassette is inserted into or removed from the CPU with
the power on, it may cause the CPU to malfunction or cause damage to the
memory.

1, 2, 3... 1. Set the DIP switch. For an EEPROM Memory Cassette, set pin no. 1 (write
protect) to either ON or OFF. Setting it to ON will protect the program in the
memory from being overwritten. Setting it to OFF will allow the program to
be overwritten. (The factory setting is OFF.)
For an EPROM Memory Cassette, set pin no. 1 (ROM Type Selector) ac-
cording to the type of ROM that is to be mounted. Even if a 27512-type chip
is mounted, the usable capacity is still only 16 KB.
Pin no. 1 ROM type Model Capacity Access speed
OFF 27256 ROM-JD-B 16 KB 150 ns
ON 27512 ROM-KD-B 32 KB 150 ns
2. Write to EPROM (if using an EPROM Memory Cassette). Using a PROM
Writer, write the program to EPROM. Then mount the EPROM chip to the
Memory Cassette, with the notched end facing upwards as shown in the il-
lustration below.

Notch

43
Installing Memory Cassettes Section 3-6

3. Remove the bracket from the Memory Cassette, as shown in the illustration
below.

Metal bracket

4. Check that the connector side goes in first and that the Cassette’s circuit
components face right and then insert the Cassette into the CPU. The Cas-
sette slides in along a track in the CPU.

5. Replace the Memory Cassette bracket over the Cassette and tighten the
screw that holds the bracket.

44
 SECTION 4
Wiring
This section provides the information necessary to wire a C200HS System.

4-1 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

4-2 AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4-3 DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4-4 RUN Output Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4-5 Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4-6 Backplane Insulation Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4-7 Standard I/O Unit Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4-8 Input Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4-9 Output Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
4-10 External Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4-11 System Design and Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4-11-1 Power Supply System and Emergency Stop Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
4-11-2 Interlock Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4-11-3 Programmable Controller Power Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

45
AC Power Supply Section 4-2

4-1 Power Supply Wiring

Pay attention to the following points when wiring the power supply.
• Be sure to mount the CPU and the I/O Power Supply Unit in their proper posi-
tions.
• Provide power to the CPU and the I/O Power Supply Unit from the same power
source. If different power sources are provided, then the CPU and the Pro-
gramming Console will not operate whenever power is not turned on to the I/O
Power Supply Unit.
• When a DC power supply is used, be sure to properly connect the plus and
minus terminals.
• Securely lock removeable terminal blocks.
• Wire the Units with the top-surface labels still in place, and then remove the
labels after the wiring is completed.

4-2 AC Power Supply

The C200HS-CPU01-E, C200HS-CPU01-EC, C200HS-CPU21-E, C200HS-
CPU21-EC and C200HS-CPU31-E CPUs, and the C200H-PS221 and
C200H-PS221-C I/O Power Supply Units use an AC power supply. Provide ei-
ther 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC, with an allowable fluctuation range of 85
to 132 VAC or 170 to 264 VAC respectively.
C200HS-CPU01-E/CPU01-EC/CPU21-E/CPU21-EC/CPU31-E
Screw (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate) Breaker
AC power source
1:1 isolation • Supply 100 to 120
transformer or 200 to 240 VAC
Voltage selector • Keep voltage fluc-
Short: 100 to 120 VAC tuations within the
Open: 200 to 240 VAC Isolation transformer
specified range (re-
+ Short-circuit these termi- • Noise between the PC fer to Appendix B
nals with the shorting and ground can be sig- Specifications)
– bracket supplied as an nificantly reduced by
accessory to select 100 connecting a 1-to-1 iso- Note:
to 120 VAC supply volt- lation transformer. Do The LG markings of the
age. For 200 to 240 VAC not ground the second- C200HS-CPUjj-E and
24-VDC output leave them open. ary coil of the transform- C200HS-CPUjj-EC
C200H-PS221/PS221-C er. are different from each
Screw (3.5 mm head with other.
self-raising pressure plate)
Power line Note:
• Use AWG 14 twisted The LG markings of the
pair cable (cross-section- C200HS-PS221 and
Voltage selector
Short: 100 to 120 VAC al area of 2 mm2 min). C200HS-PS221-C are
different from each other.
Open: 200 to 240 VAC
+ Short-circuit these terminals
with the shorting bracket
– supplied as an accessory to
select 100 to 120 VAC supply
voltage. For 200 to 240 VAC,
leave them open.
24-VDC output

Note The C200HS-CPU01-EC CPU, C200HS-CPU21-EC CPU, and

C200H-PS221-C I/O Power Supply Unit do not have an LG terminal.
24-VDC Output Use these terminals as the power supply for 24-VDC Input Units.
Note DC Power Supply Units do not have these terminals.
Crimp Terminals When wiring, use crimp terminals.
Do not connect power lines that have only been twisted together directly to the
terminal blocks.

46
DC Power Supply Section 4-3

Tighten terminal block screws with a torque of 0.8 N-m.

Use crimp terminals suitable for M3.5 screws that have the following dimension.

7 mm max.

! Caution Tighten power supply terminal screws with a torque of 0.8 N-m. Not tightening
the screws securely may result in a fire or faulty operation.

Note 1. Be sure to use the same circuits when supplying power to the Power Supply
Units.
2. Check the settings for the power supply voltage switching terminals.
3. After the wiring has been completed, be sure to remove the top-surface la-
bel in order to allow heat radiation.

4-3 DC Power Supply

The C200HS-CPU03-E, C200HS-CPU23-E, and C200HS-CPU33-E CPUs,
and the C200H-PS211 I/O Power Supply Unit use a 24-VDC power supply with
an allowable fluctuation range of 20.4 to 26.4 VDC.

C200H-CPU03-E/CPU23-E/CPU33-E
Screw (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate) Breaker
+ • Supply 24 VDC
• Keep voltage
– fluctuations within
the specified range
(refer to Appendix
B Specifications)

C200H-PS211
Screw (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)
+ Power line
• Use AWG 14 twisted
– pair cable (cross-section-
al area of 2 mm2 min).

47
Grounding Section 4-5

4-4 RUN Output Terminals

Emergency
stop circuit
To system
control RUN output
circuit
Screw (3.5 mm head with
self-raising pressure plate)

RUN Output These terminals are short-circuited during PC operation. Use them to receive
PC RUN signals, for purposes such as emergency stop circuits.
Maximum switching capacity:
250 VAC, 2 A (cos ∅ = 1)
250 VAC, 0.5 A (cos ∅ = 0.4)
24 VDC, 2 A
Note 1. I/O Power Supply Units do not have these terminals.
2. For the C200H-CPU03-E, use a DC power supply provided with reinforced
insulation or double insulation if the EC directives (low-voltage directives)
must be satisfied.

4-5 Grounding
To avoid electrical shock, attach a grounded (earth ground) AWG 14 wire (cross-
sectional area of at least 2 mm2) to the GR terminal. The resistance to ground
must be less than 100 Ω. Do not use a wire longer than 20 m. Care must be tak-
en, because ground resistance is affected by environmental conditions such as
soil composition, water content, time of year, and the length of time since the
wire was laid underground.
The Line Ground (LG) terminal is a noise-filtered neutral terminal that does not
normally require grounding. If electrical noise is a problem, however, this termi-
nal should be connected to the Ground (GR) terminal.
PC operation may be adversely affected if the ground wire is shared with other
equipment, or if the ground wire is attached to the metal structure of a building.

48
Backplane Insulation Plate Section 4-6

When using an Expansion I/O Rack, the Rack must also be grounded to the GR
terminal. The same ground can be used for all connections.

C200HS-CPU01-E/CPU01-EC/CPU03-E/CPU21-E/CPU21-EC/CPU31-E/CPU23-E/CPU33-E

Screw (3.5 mm head with

self-raising pressure plate)

C200H-PS221/PS221-C/PS211
I/O Power Supply Unit
Screw (3.5 mm
head with self-rais-
ing pressure plate)
Ground wire
(2 mm2 or
larger)

Note The LG terminal is not provided for the C200HS-CPU01-EC CPU and
C200H-PS221-C I/O Power Supply Unit.

4-6 Backplane Insulation Plate

If there is an electric potential difference between grounds when devices are
wired separately, then use a Backplane Insulation Plate. There are four models
available, corresponding to the number of slots in the Backplane. The dimen-
sions at locations A, B, C, D, and E are shown below in millimeters for each Back-
plane Insulation Plate model.
Specifications
p Model Dimensions (mm)
E D C B A
For 3 slots C200H-ATT31 261 210 --- --- 246
For 5 slots C200H-ATT51 331 280 --- --- 316
For 8 slots C200H-ATT81 436 385 --- --- 421
For 10 slots C200H-ATTA1 506 455 227.5 270.5 491

5-dia. holes for mounting

M4 screws for mounting to PC Base Insulation Plate
(4/5 places) (4/6 places)
(B) 6

12 dia.

135 (118) 110 5 dia.

C
D 10
(A)
E

49
Standard I/O Unit Wiring Section 4-7

4-7 Standard I/O Unit Wiring

! Caution Check the I/O specifications for the I/O Units, and consider the following points.

• For the I/O Units, use a DC power supply provided with reinforced insulation or
double insulation if the EC directives (low-voltage directives) must be satisfied.
• Do not apply a voltage that exceeds the input voltage for Input Units or the
maximum switching capacity for Output Units. Doing so may result in break-
down, damage or fire.
• When the power supply has positive and negative terminals, be sure to wire
them correctly.
Electric Wires The following electric wires are recommended.
Terminal Block Connector Electric Wire Size
10-terminal AWG 22 to 18 (0.33 to 0.82 mm2)
19-terminal AWG 22 (0.33 mm2)
Larger sizes than these can be used for common lines.
Note The allowable current capacity electric wire differs depending on factors such as
ambient temperature, insulation thickness, etc., so be sure to take these factors
into account when selecting electric wire.
The terminals have screws with 3.5-mm diameter heads and self-raising pres-
sure plates. Connect the lead wires to the terminals as shown below. Tighten the
screws with a maximum torque of 0.8 NSm.

Crimp Terminals If you wish to attach solderless type terminals to the ends of the lead wires, use
terminals having the dimensions shown below.

7 mm max. 7 mm max.

Wiring Be sure that each Unit is securely mounted. In order to prevent wire scraps and
other objects from getting inside of the Unit, keep the top-surface label on while
wiring the Unit. After the wiring has been completed, be sure to remove the label
in order to allow heat radiation.
During wiring After wiring

Remove the label.

50
Standard I/O Unit Wiring Section 4-7

Wire the Units so that they can be easily replaced. In addition, make sure that the
I/O indicators are not affected by the wiring.

Terminal Blocks Unlock the terminal block of an I/O Unit to remove the terminal block from the I/O
Unit. You do not have to remove the lead wires from the terminal block in order to
remove it from an I/O Unit.

Locks for terminal block.

Unlock to remove the terminal
block from the I/O Unit. Make
sure the terminal block is
locked securely after wiring is
complete.

I/O Unit Cover A C200H-COV11 Cover is provided as an I/O Unit cover for Units that use 10P
terminal block connectors. After the I/O wiring has been completed, slide the
cover up from the bottom, as shown in the illustration below.

Attach

Remove I/O Unit cover

Wiring Examples The following are examples of how to connect I/O devices to I/O Units. During
wiring, work slowly and carefully. If an input device is connected to an Output
Unit, damage may result. Check all I/O devices to make sure they meet the spec-
ifications (refer to Appendix A Specifications).

DC Input Units

Contact output

IN DC input

COM

51
Standard I/O Unit Wiring Section 4-7

When using the NPN-current-output configuration shown below, the sensor and
Input Unit should receive their power from the same supply.

NPN current output

+

Current
regulator
IN DC input
Output
7 mA Sensor
Power COM
0V Supply

NPN open-collector output

+ Sensor
Power
Supply
IN DC input
Output
7 mA
COM
0V

PNP current output

+ Sensor
Power
Supply
Output
IN AC/DC input
7 mA
0V
COM
0V

The circuit below should be used for I/O devices having a voltage output.

Voltage output

+
COM
Output
IN DC input

0V Sensor
Power
Supply

The circuit below should NOT be used for I/O devices having a voltage output.

Voltage output
Sensor
+
Power
Supply
Output
IN DC input

0V
COM

52
Input Circuits Section 4-8

AC Input Units
Contact output

IN AC input

COM

AC Switching

IN AC input
Prox-
imity
switch
main
circuit COM

4-8 Input Circuits

Input Leakage Current When two-wire sensors, such as photoelectric sensors, proximity sensors, or
limit switches with LEDs, are used for 12/24-VDC input devices, the input bit may
be turned ON erroneously by leakage current. In order to prevent this, connect a
bleeder resistor across the input as shown below.

Input
power
supply
Bleeder R PC
resistor
Sensor

If the leakage current is less than 1.3 mA, there should be no problem. If the leak-
age current is greater than 1.3 mA, determine the resistance and power rating
for the bleeder resistor using the following formulas.
For standard I/O Units:
I = leakage current in mA
7.2 kΩ max.
R = ––––––
2.4 x I – 3
2.3
W = ––– W min.
R

Precautions for When two-wire sensors are used for 12/24-VDC input devices, check that the
Connecting Two-wire following conditions are satisfied. Failure to do so may result in faulty operation.
Sensors
Relationship between ON Voltage (VON) of the PC and Residual Voltage of
the Sensor (VR)
VON x VCC – VR
Relationship between ON Current (ION) of the PC and Control Output (Load
Current) of the Sensor (IOUT)
IOUT (min) x ION x IOUT (max)
ION = (VCC – VR – 1.5 [PC’s internal residual voltage])/RIN
If ION is less than IOUT (min), connect bleeder resistance R. Obtain the constant
for the bleeder resistance according to the following formula.
R x (VCC – VR)/(IOUT (min) – ION)
Power W y (VCC – VR)2 R × 4 [tolerance]

53
Output Circuits Section 4-9

Relationship between OFF Current (IOFF) of the PC and Leakage Current of

the Sensor (Ileak)
IOFF y Ileak
For details, refer to sections providing precautions on leakage current. The val-
ue of IOFF will vary depending on the on the Unit. However, the value for Input
Units for which OFF current specifications are not listed will be 1.3 mA.

DC Input Unit

Two-wire sensor VR R RIN

VCC

VCC: Power supply voltage VR: output residual voltage in the sensor
VON: PC ON voltage IOUT: control output of the sensor (load current)
ION: PC ON current Ileak: leakage current of the sensor
IOFF: PC OFF current R: bleeder resistance
RIN: PC input impedance

4-9 Output Circuits

When wiring outputs, take the following points into consideration.

Output Short-circuit If a load connected to the output terminals is short-circuited, output elements
Protection and printed boards may be damaged. To guard against this, incorporate a
fuse in an external circuit.

Transistor Output Residual When connecting TTL circuits to transistor Output Units, it is necessary to con-
Voltage nect a pull-up resistor and a CMOS IC between the two. This is because of the
residual voltage left on the transistor output after the output turns OFF.

Output Leakage Current If there is a possibility of leakage current causing a transistor or triac to malfunc-
tion, connect a bleeder resistor across the output as shown below.

OUT
L
R
PC Load power supply
Bleeder resistor

COM

Determine the value and rating for the bleeder resistor using the following for-
mula.

Eon
R –––
I

Where
Eon = ON voltage of the load in V
I = leakage current in mA
R = bleeder resistance in kΩ

54
Output Circuits Section 4-9

Output Surge Current When connecting a transistor or triac Output Unit to an output device having a
high surge current (such as an incandescent lamp), care must be taken to avoid
damage to the Output Unit. The transistor and triac Output Units are capable of
withstanding a surge current of ten times the rated current. If the surge current
for a particular device exceeds this amount, use the circuit shown below to pro-
tect the Output Unit.

OUT L

+
R

COM

Another way of protecting the Output Unit lets the load draw a small current
(about one third the rated current) while the output is OFF, significantly reducing
the surge current. This circuit (shown below) not only reduces the surge current,
but also reduces the voltage across the load at the same time.

R
OUT L

COM

Electrical Noise Whenever possible, place I/O signal lines and power lines in separate ducts or
tubes. If placing them together cannot be avoided, use shielded cable to mini-
mize the effects, and connect the shielded end to the GR terminal.

55
Output Circuits Section 4-9

Inductive Load Surge When an inductive load is connected to an I/O Unit, it is necessary to connect a
Suppressor surge suppressor or diode in parallel with the load as shown below. This is so
that the back EMF generated by the load will be absorbed.
IN

L Diode DC input

COM

L
OUT

Contact Output Unit

Triac Output Unit
Surge suppressor

COM

L
OUT

Contact Output Unit +

Transistor Output Unit
Diode

COM

Use surge suppressors and diodes with the following specifications.

Surge Suppressor
Resistance: 50 Ω
Capacitor: 0.47 µF
Voltage: 200 V
Diode
Leading-edge peak inverse voltage: At least 3 times load voltage
Average rectified current: 1A

56
System Design and Safety Considerations Section 4-11

4-10 External Wiring

If power cables must be run alongside the I/O wiring (that is, in parallel with it), at
least 300 mm must be left between the power cables and the I/O wiring as shown
below.

Low current cable

1

300 mm min.
Control cable
2

300 mm min.
Power cable
3

Class-3 ground

Where: 1 = I/O wiring

2 = General control wiring
3 = Power cables
If the I/O wiring and power cables must be placed in the same duct (for example,
where they are connected to the equipment), they must be shielded from each
other using grounded metal plates.

Metal plate (iron)

200 mm min.
1 2 3

Class-3 ground

Where: 1 = I/O wiring

2 = General control wiring
3 = Power cables

4-11 System Design and Safety Considerations

When designing a C200HS system, be sure to consider the following points:
• Power supply system wiring and emergency stop circuit
• Interlock circuit
• Programmable Controller power interruptions

4-11-1 Power Supply System and Emergency Stop Circuit

The power section, control section, PC System, and the DC I/O system should
all be wired separately.

57
System Design and Safety Considerations Section 4-11

An external relay should be used to form an emergency stop circuit that turns the
power to the PC OFF in the event of an emergency. An emergency stop routine
in the PC program is not sufficient to ensure safety. The circuit shown below is an
example of an emergency stop circuit. Incorporate the PC RUN output terminal
into an external relay circuit (CR1 in the diagram below) so that a PC breakdown
or malfunction will not affect the entire system.

MCB1

Power section

MCB2 CR1

Control section

Transformer
or noise filter
PC

Twisted

DC voltage +
regulator –
PC RUN DC input/output
output

Surge
CR1 suppressor

4-11-2 Interlock Circuit

When the PC controls an operation such as the clockwise and counterclock-
wise operation of a motor, provide an external interlock such as the one
shown below to prevent both the forward and reverse outputs from turning
ON at the same time.

Interlock circuit

MC2
00501
MC1 Motor clockwise

PC
MC1
00502
MC2 Motor counterclockwise

This circuit prevents outputs MC1 and MC2 from ever both being ON at the same
time. Even if the PC is programmed improperly or malfunctions, the motor is pro-
tected.

58
System Design and Safety Considerations Section 4-11

4-11-3 Programmable Controller Power Interruptions

A sequential circuit is built into the PC to handle power interruptions. This circuit
prevents malfunctions due to momentary power loss or voltage drops. A timing
diagram for the operation of this circuit is shown below.
The PC ignores all momentary power failures if the interruption lasts no longer
than 10 ms. If the interruption lasts between 10 and 25 ms, the interruption may
or may not be detected. If the supply voltage drops below 85% of the rated volt-
age for longer that 25 ms (less for the DC Power Supply), the PC will stop operat-
ing and the external outputs will be automatically turned OFF.
Operation is resumed automatically when the voltage is restored to more than
85% of the rated value. The diagram below shows the timing of PC operation
and stopping during a power interruption. The time it takes to detect the power
failure is shorter when the power supply is DC.
Power Power
interrupted restored
Power supply
Time lapse until
Power failure detection signal detection

+5 V
CPU operating voltage

Power supply reset

1s
Output during operation

59
 SECTION 5
Peripheral Devices and System Expansion
A Programming Console or IBM PC/AT running Ladder Support Software (LSS) or SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) can
be used to program and monitor the C200HS PCs. This section provides general information about the Programming Console,
LSS, SSS, and ways in which the C200HS System can be expanded for more versatility. For descriptions of new Programming
Console operations, refer to the C200HS Operation Manual (W235). For details concerning LSS and SSS, refer to the Ladder
Support Software Operation Manual (W237) and the SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manuals (Basics: W247; C-se-
ries PCs: W248) respectively.

5-1 Programming Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

5-1-1 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
5-2 Checking Initial C200HS Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5-3 Expanding the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5-4 Special I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5-4-1 Required Mounting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5-4-2 Special I/O Units and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5-5 Ladder Support Software (LSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5-6 SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

61
Programming Console Section 5-1

5-1 Programming Console

There are two Programming Console models that can be used with the C200HS:
the C200H-PRO27-E and the CQM1-PRO01-E. The following illustration shows
how a Programming Console (a C200H-PRO27-E in this case) connects to the
C200HS CPU.

C200H-CN222, C200H-CN422,
C200HS-CN222, or C200HS-CN422
Connecting Cable

C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console

As indicated in the illustration, the C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console

connects to the C200HS CPU with C200H-CN222, C200H-CN422,
C200HS-CN222, or C200HS-CN422 Connecting Cable which must be pur-
chased separately. The C200HS-CN222 and C200HS-CN422 Connecting
Cables conform to EC directives.
An anti-static cover is provided for the C200HS-CN222/CN422 over the connec-
tor on the CPU side.
The CQM1-PRO01-E Programming Console comes with 2 m of Connecting
Cable.

62
Programming Console Section 5-1

5-1-1 Nomenclature
The front panel of the Programming Console is shown below, taking the
C200H-PRO27-E as an example.

C200H-PRO27-E Programming Console

LCD area

Mode selector switch

Instruction keys

Numeric keys

Cassette jacks Operation keys

LCD Area This window displays the program contents and monitor status.

Mode Selector Switch PROGRAM MODE: Used for creating programs.

RUN MODE: Used for executing the programs.
MONITOR MODE: Used for monitoring C200HS status.

Keys Instruction, numeric, and operation keys are used for inputting the program and
data.
Note 1. The operations of C200H-PRO27-E and CQM1-PRO01-E Programming
Consoles are the same.
2. The following keys look different but have the same functions.

AR
HR
HR

PLAY
SET
SET

REC
RESET
RESET

3. The cassette jacks are not used by the C200HS.

63
Expanding the System Section 5-3

5-2 Checking Initial C200HS Operation

After the Programming Console has been connected, it can be used to check
initial C200HS operation. Make sure that the Programming Console is properly
connected and that the correct power supply is being provided, and then follow
the procedure outlined below.
1, 2, 3... 1. Check to be sure that the Programming Console is in PROGRAM mode.
MONITOR
RUN PROGRAM

2. Turn on the power to the C200HS and check the CPU indicators. The green
POWER indicator should light.
3. Check the Programming Console display and input the password (Clear
and then Monitor Keys). If operation is normal, the display should appear as
shown below.

<PROGRAM>
PASSWORD

<PROGRAM> BZ

Indicates the mode set by the mode selector switch.

4. After checking C200HS operation, turn off the power. If operation is not nor-
mal, refer to Section 6 Troubleshooting.

5-3 Expanding the System

The C200HS System can be expanded to include a Host Link System (SYSMAC
WAY), a PC Link System, Optical or Wired Remote I/O Systems (SYSMAC
BUS) and SYSMAC NET Link or SYSMAC LINK System (C200HS-CPU31-
E/CPU33-E only). All of these can be used in common with the C200H. In addi-
tion, the following Units can be connected: Interrupt Input Unit, Analog Timer
Unit, and B7A Interface Unit. Specifications for all of these Units are provided in
Appendix B Specifications.
Host Link System A maximum of two Host Link Units can be mounted to slots in either the CPU
Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. The following Host Link Units are available:
C200H-LK101-PV1 (optical cable)
C200H-LK201-PV1 (RS-232C)
C200H-LK202-V1 (RS-422)
For details, refer to the SYSMAC C-series Rack PCs SYSMAC WAY – Host Link
Units System Manual (W143).
SYSMAC LINK Systems OMRON’s SYSMAC LINK System is a communications network that connects
up to 62 nodes to provide data links, data transfers, and datagram services.
• Data links provide automatic transfer of up to 918 words of data in the LR and/
or DM Areas.
• Data transfers of up to 256 words each can be implemented by programming
the NETWORK READ (RECV(98)) and NETWORK WRITE (SEND(90))
instructions in the user program.

64
Expanding the System Section 5-3

• Data transfers via datagrams are also available using a command/response

format.
The C200HS-CPU31-E or C200HS-CPU33-E must be used to enable applica-
tion of SYSMAC LINK Systems. The C200H-CE001 and C200H-CE002 Bus
Connection Units are used to connect SYSMAC LINK Units to the CPU, and the
C200H-APS03 Auxiliary Power Supply Unit is used as a backup power supply
for optical SYSMAC LINK Systems.

Note Refer to the SYSMAC LINK System Manual (W174) for further information.

C200HS CPU
C200HS-CPU31-E or
C200HS-CPU33-E

SYSMAC LINK Unit

C200HW-SLK13/SLK14
(optical)
C200HW-SLK23/SLK24
(coaxial cable)

SYSMAC-series PC

SYSMAC NET Link Systems OMRON’s SYSMAC NET Link System is an FA-oriented limited-area network
that connects up to 126 nodes to provide datagram services, data transfers, and
data links.
• Data transfers via datagrams are implemented using a command/response
format.
• Data transfers can also be implemented for up to 990 words each by program-
ming the NETWORK READ (RECV(98)) and NETWORK WRITE (SEND(90))
instructions in the user program.
• Data links provide automatic transfer of up to 32 words of data in the LR Area
and/or up to 99 words of data in other data areas.
The C200HS-CPU31-E or C200HS-CPU33-E must be used to enable applica-
tion of SYSMAC NET Link Systems. The C200H-CE001 and C200H-CE002
Bus Connection Units are used to connect SYSMAC NET Link Units to the CPU,
and the C200H-APS01 and C200H-APS02 Power Supply Adapters are used to
connect to a central power supply (and must be mounted in the slot immediately
to the left of the SYSMAC NET Link Unit).

65
Expanding the System Section 5-3

Note Refer to the SYSMAC NET Link System Manual (W178) for further information.

SYSMAC NET Link Unit

C200HS-SNT32

C200HS CPU
C200HS-CPU31-E or
C200HS-CPU33-E

Line server

Central power supply

FA computer SYSMAC-series PC

PC Link System A PC Link System can be used to transfer data between PCs by means of LR
0000 through LR 6315. A maximum of two C200H-LK401 PC Link Units can be
mounted to slots in either the CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. For details,
refer to the PC Link System Manual (W135).

Remote I/O Systems A maximum of two Optical or Wired Remote I/O Master Units can be mounted to
slots in either the CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. A maximum total of five
Slave Racks, each with a single Slave Unit, can be connected. C500 Slave
Racks can be used, but each C500 Slave Rack must be counted as two Racks in
calculating the total. For details, refer to the SYSMAC C-series Rack PCs Wired
Remote I/O System Manual (W120) or SYSMAC C-series Optical Remote I/O
System Manual (W136).
Optical Systems
Optical and Wired Units cannot be mixed. A maximum total of 64 (32 words) Op-
tical I/O Units can be connected in an optical system.

Note 1. The number of Slave Racks is not related to the number of Master Units.
2. If the number of Optical I/O Units exceeds 32, a B500-RPT01(-P) Repeater
Unit is required.
Wired Systems
A maximum total of 32 I/O Interface Terminals and I/O Relay Terminals can be
connected in a wired system. The number is unrelated to the number of Master
Units mounted.

Special I/O Units All of the Special I/O Units usable with the C200H can be used in common with
the C200HS. A maximum of ten Special I/O Units (including PC Link Units) can
be mounted to slots in either the CPU Rack, Expansion I/O Racks, or Slave
Racks. For details, refer to the individual Special I/O Unit manuals and the fol-
lowing information.

66
Special I/O Units Section 5-4

5-4 Special I/O Units

It is possible to connect a variety of Special I/O Units to the C200HS in the same
way as the C200H.

5-4-1 Required Mounting Conditions

A maximum of 10 Special I/O Units including PC Link Units can be mounted to
any slot of CPU, Expansion I/O, and Slave Racks. I/O word numbers 100 to 199
and DM 1000 to DM 1999 are allocated to each Special I/O Unit.
High-density I/O Units can be mounted Remote I/O Slave Units only when the
Remote I/O Slave Units are connected to C200H-RM001-PV1 or C200H-
RM201 Remote I/O Master Units.
The number of Special I/O Units used with a Slave Rack is limited by data trans-
mission considerations, as shown in the table below. The numbers in the table
indicate the maximum number of Units of groups A, B, C, or D which can be used
with a single Slave Rack.

A B C D
High-speed Counter Units High-density and Mixed I/O Temperature Sensor Units Position Control Units
Position Control Units Units Voice Units (NC211)
(NC111/112) Temperature Control Units
ASCII Units Cam Positioner Units
Analog I/O Units Heat/Cool Temperature
ID Sensor Units Control Unit
Fuzzy Logic Units PID Control Unit
4 units max. 8 units max. 6 units max. 2 units max.

Note 1. When a combination of Units from groups A, B, C, and D is used, the number
from each group must satisfy both the following equations:
3A + B + 2C + 6D ≤ 12
A+B+C+D≤8
2. Other Units can be added until the total number of Units reaches ten. If PC
Link Units are used, the number of Units including the PC Link Units must
not exceed ten.

5-4-2 Special I/O Units and Functions

Refer to page 103 for the specifications of each Special I/O Unit.

High-density I/O Units The TTL Input Unit, DC Input Unit, TTL Output Unit, Transistor Output Unit, TTL
(Special I/O Units) I/O Unit, and DC Input/Transistor Output Unit are High-density I/O Units.
The C200H-ID501, C200H-OD501, and C200H-MD501 are I/O Units for the
TTL Unit.
Eight input points each of the C200H-ID501, C200H-ID215, C200H-MD501,
C200H-MD115, and C200H-MD215 can be set for pulse input.
A High-density I/O Unit can retrieve pulse input, which is shorter in length than
that of the High-density I/O Unit cycle time, as an input signal when the High-
density I/O Unit is set for pulse input.

67
Special I/O Units Section 5-4

The C200H-MD501, C200H-MD115, and C200H-MD215 can each be set for

128 dynamic input points (64 points x two circuits) and the C200H-OD501 and
C200H-OD215 can each be set for 128 dynamic output points (64 points x two
circuits).

High-speed Counter Units The High-speed Counter Units have the following six operation modes.
Linear, circular, preset, gate, latch, and sampling operation modes
The High-speed Counter Units, which have a counting speed of 50 kcps, can be
used for phase-difference pulse input, adding and subtracting pulse input, and
pulse and direction input. The High-speed Counter Units have eight-point output
per single axis.

Rotary Encoder

Position Control Units The Position Control Units have pulse-train output, thus enabling connection to
stepping motor drivers or servomotor drivers.
The C200H-NC111 and C200H-NC112 are for a single axis, and the C200H-
NC211 is for two axes.

Stepping motor
driver or servo-
motor driver with
pulse-train input.

Stepping motor
or servomotor

5-V power supply

68
Special I/O Units Section 5-4

Analog I/O Units The Analog Input (A/D) Units retrieve analog inputs and the Analog Output (D/A)
Unit sends analog outputs.
The following Analog I/O Units are available:
C200H-AD001 with 4-point analog input, C200H-AD002 with 8-point analog in-
put, C200H-DA001 with 2-point analog output, and C200H-DA002 with 4-point
analog output

The Analog Input (AD) Unit is used.

Analog input Preamplifier Sensor

transducer

Analog output Servomotor controller Motor

variable adjuster

The Analog Output (DA) Unit is used.

Temperature Sensor Units The following table lists Temperature Sensor Unit models and available temper-
ature sensors.
Only one kind of temperature sensor can be connected to the C200H-TS001 or
C200H-TS002. Each Temperature Sensor Unit connects to a maximum of four
temperature sensor inputs.
Model Connectable temperature sensor
C200H-TS001 K (CA)/K (IC)
C200H-TS002 K (CA)/L (Fe-CuNi) (available for DIN)
C200H-TS101 JPt 100 Ω
C200H-TS102 Pt 100 Ω (available for DIN/1989JIS)

Thermocouple: K (CA), J (IC), L (Fe-CuNi)

Platinum resistance thermometer: JPt100 Ω, Pt100 Ω

ASCII Unit BASIC programs can be input to the ASCII Unit via its port 1 from any personal
computer in terminal mode if the personal computer incorporates an RS-232C
interface.
It is possible to write BASIC programs with an IBM PC/AT or compatible.

Port 1
BASIC Program:
Personal computer
(RS-232C)
Input: Bar code reader
Port 1/2 Output: Printer and plasma display

69
Special I/O Units Section 5-4

Voice Unit Voice messages can be input from dynamic microphones or cassette tape re-
corders and output from loudspeakers or headsets via the Voice Unit.
The Voice Unit incorporates a sentence function and word combination function,
either of which can be selected to record voice messages for 64 seconds maxi-
mum.
Voice can be saved on floppy disks with an IBM PC/AT or compatible.

Voice input
Microphone or cassette tape player

Voice output
Headset or speaker

Voice saving/Re-input Personal computer, or PROM Writer

C200H-CN224 Connect-
ing Cable (2 m long with
6- and 25-pin connectors)

ID Sensor Units The ID Sensor Units are used to construct non-contact information recognition
systems.
By connecting a R/W Head or R/W Antenna to an ID Sensor Unit, data can be
written to the Data Carrier attached to each moving object and the data of the
Data Carrier can be read by the C200HS.
The following models of ID Sensor Units are available.
Electromagnetic induction model: C200H-IDS01-V1
Microwave model: C200H-IDS21

C200H-PRO27-E
Programming Console

Data Carrier
R/W Head
R/W Antenna

70
Special I/O Units Section 5-4

Fuzzy Logic Unit The C200H-FZ001 Fuzzy Logic Unit incorporates a high-functional fuzzy Logic
processor and allows high-speed fuzzy logic.
A personal computer can be connected to the Fuzzy Logic Unit via RS-232C
cables for software development and monitoring. Use the C500-SU981-E Fuzzy
Support Software for IBM PC/AT or compatible personal computers.

Temperature Control Units Thermocouples or platinum resistance thermometers connect to the Tempera-
ture Control Unit. With the built-in selector of the Temperature Control Unit, ten
kinds of thermocouples or two kinds of platinum resistance thermometers can
be selected.
Select the control output of the Temperature Control Unit from the following.
Model Temperature sensor input Control output
C200H-TC001 Thermocouple:
p Transistor output
C200H-TC002 R S
R, S, K (CA)
(CA), J (IC)
(IC), T (CC)
(CC), Voltage output
(CRC) B,
E (CRC), B NN, L (IC),
(IC) U (CC)
C200H-TC003 Current output
C200H-TC101 Platinum resistance thermometer: Transistor output
C200H-TC102 JP 100 P
JPt100, Pt100
100 Voltage output
C200H-TC103 Current output

Temperature Control Unit Data Setting Console

71
Special I/O Units Section 5-4

Cam Positioner Unit A single C200H-CP114 Cam Positioner Unit is as powerful as 48 mechanical
cams because it can complete jobs that normally require 48 mechanical cams.
It is possible to set 16-point external output and 32-point internal output as cam
output. The 32-point internal output can be retrieved as data by the C200HS.
Cam Positioner Unit Data Setting Console

Heat/Cool Temperature The Heat/Cool Temperature Control Units measure the temperature of an object
Control Units with a connected temperature sensor (thermocouple or platinum resistance
thermometer), and heats and cools according to a preset control mode.
Select the control output of the Heat/Cool Temperature Control Unit from the fol-
lowing.
Model Temperature sensor input Control output
C200H-TV001 Thermocouple:
p Transistor output
C200H-TV002 R S
R, S, K (CA)
(CA), J (IC)
(IC), T (CC)
(CC), Voltage output
E (CRC),
(CRC) B,B NN, L (IC),
(IC) U (CC)
C200H-TV003 Current output
C200H-TV101 Platinum resistance thermometer: Transistor output
C200H-TV102 JP 100 P
JPt100, Pt100
100 Voltage output
C200H-TV103 Current output

Heat/Cool Temperature Control Unit Data Setting Console

72
SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) Section 5-6

PID Control Unit The PID Control Unit scales inputs from connected sensors and then carries out
PID control according to preset control mode.
Select the control output of the PID Control Unit from the following.
Model Control output
C200H-PID01 Transistor output
C200H-PID02 Voltage output
C200H-PID03 Current output

PID Control Unit Data Setting Console

5-5 Ladder Support Software (LSS)

The LSS is a powerful support software package for the OMRON C-series Pro-
grammable Controllers (PCs). The LSS runs on an IBM PC/AT or compatible
personal computer, and can be use to program, monitor and control PCs. While
some PCs require a SYSMAC NET Link Unit, Host Link Unit, or Peripheral Inter-
face Unit to connect the computer running LSS, the C200HS can be connected
directly to the LSS via it’s peripheral or RS-232C port.
The LSS provides displays of various useful lists when the computer is operated
offline and can be used to monitor operating conditions of the PC, and to read
and write PC data. PC programs can be developed in a mnemonic or ladder dia-
gram form.
When working in ladder diagram form, not only the program is displayed but also
other information such as I/O, block, and instruction comments can be input and
displayed. Moreover, the LSS allows more than one PC to be connected to and
monitored using a single computer. The monitoring speed can be accelerated if
the optional S3200-NSB11-E SYSMAC NET NSB is used.
For details concerning LSS, refer to the Ladder Support Software Operation
Manual (W237).

5-6 SYSMAC Support Software (SSS)

The SSS is an advanced software application that runs on IBM PC/AT or compa-
tibles and is used to program, monitor, and otherwise control OMRON SYSMAC
C-series PCs and SYSMAC CVM1 PCs. The C200HS can be connected directly
to a computer running the SSS in exactly the same way as for the LSS.
The SSS can be used with any of the CVM1 PCs and with all of the many C-se-
ries PCs. The SSS automatically switches programming styles and other opera-
tions between the various PCs when a PC model is set in the SSS’s System Set-
up.
All programs written on the Ladder Support Software or on the CV Support Soft-
ware can be read and used by the SSS. Programs created for the C2000H or
C200HS families of PCs can be converted for use with CVM1 PCs so that exist-
ing programs can be used with the newer PCs.

73
SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) Section 5-6

The SSS naturally supports all of the functionality for C-series PCs as the LSS,
plus some new functions that facilitate fast, efficient programming and opera-
tion.

74
 SECTION 6
Troubleshooting
The C200HS provides self-diagnostic functions to identify many types of abnormal system conditions. These functions mini-
mize downtime and enable quick, smooth error correction.
This section provides information on hardware and software errors that occur during PC operation. It also provides trouble-
shooting charts for CPU Racks, Expansion I/O Racks, Input Units, and Output Units.

6-1 Alarm Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

6-2 Programmed Alarms and Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6-3 Reading and Clearing Errors and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
6-4 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6-5 CPU Racks and Expansion I/O Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
6-6 Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
6-7 Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

75
Reading and Clearing Errors and Messages Section 6-3

6-1 Alarm Indicators

The ALM/ERR indicator on the front of the CPU provides visual indication of an
abnormality in the PC. When the indicator is ON (ERROR), a fatal error (i.e.,
ones that will stop PC operation) has occurred; when the indicator is flashing
(ALARM), a nonfatal error has occurred.

! Caution The PC will turn ON the ALM/ERR indicator, stop program execution, and turn
OFF all outputs from the PC for most hardware errors, for certain fatal software
errors, or when FALS(07) is executed in the program (see tables on following
pages). PC operation will continue for all other errors. It is the user’s responsibil-
ity to take adequate measures to ensure that a hazardous situation will not result
from automatic system shutdown for fatal errors and to ensure that proper ac-
tions are taken for errors for which the system is not automatically shut down.
System flags and other system and/or user-programmed error indications can
be used to program proper actions.

6-2 Programmed Alarms and Error Messages

FAL(06), FALS(07), and MSG(46) can be used in the program to provide
user-programmed information on error conditions. With these three instructions,
the user can tailor error diagnosis to aid in troubleshooting.
FAL(06) is used with a FAL number other than 00, which is output to the SR area
when FAL(06) is executed. Executing FAL(06) will not stop PC operation or di-
rectly affect any outputs from the PC.
FALS(07) is also used with a FAL number, which is output to the same location in
the SR area when FALS(07) is executed. Executing FALS(07) will stop PC op-
eration and will cause all outputs from the PC to be turned OFF.
When FAL(06) is executed with a function number of 00, the current FAL number
contained in the SR area is cleared and replaced by another, if more have been
stored in memory by the system.
When MSG(46) is used a message containing specified data area words is dis-
played onto the Programming Console or another Programming Device.
The use of these instructions is described in detail in the C200HS Operation
Manual (W235).

6-3 Reading and Clearing Errors and Messages

System error messages can be displayed onto the Programming Console or
other Programming Device.
On the Programming Console, press the CLR, FUN, and MONTR keys. If there
are multiple error messages stored by the system, the MONTR key can be
pressed again to access the next message. If the system is in PROGRAM mode,
pressing the MONTR key will clear the error message, so be sure to write down
all message errors as you read them. (It is not possible to clear an error or a mes-
sage while in RUN or MONITOR mode; the PC must be in PROGRAM mode.)
When all messages have been cleared, “ERR CHK OK” will be displayed.
Details on accessing error messages from the Programming Console are pro-
vided in the C200HS Operation Manual (W235). Procedures for the LSS are pro-
vided in the LSS Operation Manual (W237).

76
Error Messages Section 6-4

6-4 Error Messages

There are basically three types of errors for which messages are displayed: in-
itialization errors, non-fatal operating errors, and fatal operating errors. Most of
these are also indicated by FAL number being transferred to the FAL area of the
SR area.
The type of error can be quickly determined from the indicators on the CPU, as
described below for the three types of errors. If the status of an indicator is not
mentioned in the description, it makes no difference whether it is lit or not.
After eliminating the cause of an error, clear the error message from memory
before resuming operation.
Asterisks in the error messages in the following tables indicate variable numeric
data. An actual number would appear on the display.

Initialization Errors The following error messages appear before program execution has been
started. The POWER indicator will be lit and the RUN indicator will not be lit for
either of these. The RUN output will be OFF for each of these errors.

Error and message FAL no. Probable cause Possible correction

Waiting for Special I/O None A Special I/O Unit or Perform the I/O Table Read
or Interrupt Input Units Interrupt Input Unit has not operation to check unit
initialized. numbers. Replace Unit if it
CPU WAIT'G is indicated by “$” only in
the I/O table.
(High-density I/O Units will
not appear on I/O Table
Read display for all
peripheral devices.)
Waiting for Remote I/O None Power to Remote I/O Unit is Check power supply to
off or terminator cannot be Remote I/O Units,
CPU WAIT'G found. connections between
Remote I/O Units, and
terminator setting.

Non-fatal Operating Errors The following error messages appear for errors that occur after program execu-
tion has been started. PC operation and program execution will continue after
one or more of these errors have occurred. For each of these errors, the
POWER and RUN indicators will be lit and the ALM/ERR indicator will be flash-
ing. The RUN output will be ON.

Error and message FAL no. Probable cause Possible correction

01 to 99 FAL(06) has been executed Correct according to cause
FAL error in program. Check the FAL indicated by FAL number
SYS FAIL FAL** number to determine (set by user).
conditions that would cause
execution (set by user).

8A An error occurred in data Replace the Interrupt Input

Interrupt Input Unit error transfer between the Unit.
SYS FAIL FAL8A Interrupt Input Unit and the
CPU.

77
Error Messages Section 6-4

Error and message FAL no. Probable cause Possible correction

8B Interrupt subroutine Check the interrupt
Interrupt subroutine error containing Special I/O Unit subroutine and PC Setup.
SYS FAIL FAL8B refresh was too long.
Cyclic Special I/O Unit
refreshing was not disabled
for interrupt subroutine
refresh.
9A An error occurred in data Check AR 0205 to AR 0214
High-density I/O Unit error transfer between a to identify the Unit with a
SYS FAIL FAL9A High-density I/O Unit and problem, replace the Unit,
the CPU. and restart the PC.

9B An error has been detected Check an correct PC Setup

PC Setup error in the PC Setup. This error settings.
SYS FAIL FAL9B will be generated when the
setting is read or used for
the first time.

9D An error has occurred Make sure that the PC is in

Memory Cassette Transfer error during data transmission PROGRAM mode.
SYS FAIL FAL9D between UM and a Memory Make sure that the Memory
Cassette because: Cassette is not
Not in PROGRAM Mode. write-protected.
UM or Memory Cassette is Make sure that the UM and
read-only. Memory Cassette capacity
Insufficient capacity in UM is sufficient.
or Memory Cassette. Make sure the SYSMAC
A checksum error occurred NET data link is not
in the Memory Cassette operating and transfer again
(SR 27011 will be ON).
Transfer the data again.

Cycle time overrun F8 Watchdog timer has Program cycle time is

exceeded 100 ms. longer than recommended.
CYCLE TIME OVER
Reduce cycle time if
possible.

I/O table verification error E7 Unit has been removed or Use I/O Table Verify
replaced by a different kind Operation to check I/O table
I/O VER ERR
of Unit, making I/O table and either connect dummy
incorrect. Units or register the I/O
table again.
Remote I/O error B0 or B1 Error occurred in Check transmission line
transmissions between between PC and Master
REMOTE ERR *
Remote I/O
Remote I/O Units. and between Remote I/O
Master Unit number Units.

D0 Error has occurred in PC Determine the unit number

Special I/O Unit error
Link Unit, Remote I/O of the Unit which caused the
SIOU ERR Master Unit, between a error (AR 00), correct the
Host Link, SYSMAC LINK, error, and toggle the
or SYSMAC NET Link Unit appropriate Restart Bit in
and the CPU, or in refresh AR 01, SR 250, or SR 252.
between Special I/O Unit If the Unit does not restart,
and the CPU. replace it.
Battery error F7 Backup battery is missing or Check battery, and replace
its voltage has dropped. if necessary.
BATT LOW

78
Error Messages Section 6-4

Communications Errors The COMM or COMM 1 indicator will go out for errors in communications be-
tween the peripheral port and a peripheral device and COMM 2 will will go out for
errors in communications between the RS-232C port and a peripheral device. If
an error is indicated, check the communications path and the C200HS program.
The ports can be reset using the Peripheral Port Reset Bit (SR 25208) and the
RS-232C Port Reset Bit (SR 25209).

Fatal Operating Errors The following error messages appear for errors that occur after program execu-
tion has been started. PC operation and program execution will stop and all out-
puts from the PC will be turned OFF when any of the following errors occur. No
CPU indicators will be lit for the power interruption error. For all other fatal oper-
ating errors, the POWER and ALM/ERR indicators will be lit. The RUN output will
be OFF.

Error and message FAL no. Probable cause Possible correction

Power interruption 00 Power has been Check power supply voltage
No message. interrupted for at least and power lines. Try to
10 ms. power-up again.

CPU error None Watchdog timer has Restart system in PROGRAM

exceeded maximum mode and check program.
No message.
setting (default setting: Reduce cycle time or reset
130 ms). watchdog timer if longer time
required. (Consider effects of
longer cycle time before
resetting.)
Memory error F1 SR 27211 ON: Check the PC Setup.
MEMORY ERR A checksum error has
occurred in the PC
Setup (DM 6600 to
DM 6655).
SR 27212 ON: Check the program.
A checksum error has
occurred in the program,
indicating an incorrect
instruction.
SR 27213 ON
A checksum error has
occurred in an
expansion instruction
change.
SR 27214 ON: Install the Memory Cassette
Memory Cassette was correctly.
installed or removed
with the power on.
SR 27215 ON: Check whether the CPU
Autoboot error. memory is protected or a
checksum error occurred in the
Memory Cassette.
No END(01) instruction F0 END(01) is not written Write END(01) at the final
anywhere in program. address of the program.
NO END INST

I/O bus error C0 to C2 Error has occurred in The rightmost digit of the FAL
the bus line between the number will indicate the number
I/O BUS ERR *
Rack no. CPU and I/O Units. of the Rack where the error was
detected. Check cable
connections between the I/O
Units and Racks.

79
Error Messages Section 6-4

Error and message FAL no. Probable cause Possible correction

Too many Units E1 Two or more Special I/O Perform the I/O Table Read
Units are set to the operation to check unit
I/O UNIT OVER same unit number numbers, and eliminate
Two or more Group-2 duplications. (High-density I/O
High-density I/O Units or Units other than Group-2 are
B7A Interface Units are Special I/O Units, too.)
set to the same I/O Set unit numbers of 64-pt
number or I/O word. Group-2 Units to numbers other
The I/O number of a than 9.
64-pt Group-2 Correct the settings.
High-density I/O Unit is Mount only one Interrupt Unit.
set to 9.
SYSMAC NET or
SYSMAC LINK systems
are using duplicate
settings (CPU31/33-E
only).
More than one Interrupt
Unit is mounted.
Input-output I/O table error E0 Input and output word Check the I/O table with I/O
designations registered Table Verification operation and
I/O SET ERROR
in I/O table do no agree check all Units to see that they
with input/output words are in correct configuration.
required by Units When the system has been
actually mounted. confirmed, register the I/O table
again.
FALS error 01 to 99 FALS has been Correct according to cause
or 9F executed by the indicated by FAL number. If FAL
SYS FAIL FALS**
program. Check the FAL number is 9F, check watchdog
number to determine timer and cycle time, which may
conditions that would be to long. 9F will be output
cause execution (Set by when FALS(07) is executed and
user or by system). the cycle time is between 120
and 130 ms.

80
CPU Racks and Expansion I/O Racks Section 6-5

Other Error Messages A number of other error messages are detailed within this manual. Errors in pro-
gram input and debugging and errors in cassette tape operation are detailed in
the C200HS Operation Manual (W235). Information on error flags is also con-
tained in the C200HS Operation Manual (W235).

6-5 CPU Racks and Expansion I/O Racks

Error Probable cause Possible correction
POWER indicator does not light. A fuse is blown. Replace the fuse.
Fuses are frequently blown. The voltage selector terminal setting is Correct the voltage selector terminal
wrong. setting.
Pattern short-circuiting or damage Replace the CPU or Power Supply
from fire Unit.
RUN indicator does not light. The program has an error (no END Correct the program.
instruction).
The voltage selector terminal setting is Correct the voltage selector terminal
wrong. setting.
A power supply line is defective. Replace the CPU.
Special I/O Units are assigned Correct the unit number assignments.
overlapping unit numbers.
A Slave Unit’s power supply is turned Turn on the power to the Slave Unit,
off, or no Unit is set as the terminator. or set a Unit as the terminator.
RUN indicator is lit, but RUN output The power circuit is defective. Replace the CPU.
does not turn on.
Relays do not operate from a The I/O bus is defective. Replace the Backplane.
particular number onwards.
Outputs (or inputs) turn ON for
particular Relay numbers.
All the bits from a particular Unit turn
ON.

81
Input Units Section 6-6

6-6 Input Units

Error Probable cause Possible correction
Indicator lights are turned off, and no No external input power supply is Provide a power supply.
pu s turn
inputs u O ON. provided.
The external input voltage is low. Supply the rated voltage.
Terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
Indicator lights are turned ON, but no The input circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
inputs turn ON.
All inputs remain ON, and will not turn The input circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
OFF.
Inputs
p do not turn ON for p
particular An input device is defective. Replace the input device.
R l numbers.
Relay b Input wiring is disconnected. Check the input wiring.
Terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
The ON time for external inputs is too Adjust the input device.
short.
The input circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
An input bit address is used for an Correct the program.
OUT instruction in the program.
Inputs
p do not turn OFF for particular
p The input circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
R l numbers.
Relay b An input bit address is used for an Correct the program.
OUT instruction in the program.
Inputs
p are turning
g ON and OFF The external input voltage is low. Supply the rated voltage.
i l l
irregularly. There is malfunctioning due to noise. Apply noise countermeasures such as
installing a surge suppressor,
installing an isolation transformer, and
using shielded cables.
Terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
Malfunctioning
g Relays
y are in g
groups
p of Common terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
eight.
i h Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
The CPU is defective. Replace the CPU.
Operation is normal, but the input The LED is defective. Replace the Unit.
indicator does not light.

82
Output Units Section 6-7

6-7 Output Units

Error Probable cause Possible correction
No outputs
p turn ON. A load power supply is not provided. Provide the power supply.
The load power supply voltage is low. Provide the rated voltage.
Terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
A fuse is blown. Replace the fuse.
I/O bus connectors are making poor Replace the Unit.
contact.
The output circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
Outputs all fail to turn OFF. The output circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
Indicators do not light, and the outputs The output ON time is too short. Correct the program.
for particular Relay numbers do not
turn ON.
The output circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
The program’s OUT instruction bit Correct the program.
addresses overlap.
Indicators light,
g , but the outputs
p for An output device is defective. Replace the output device.
particular
i l R Relay
l numbers
b d
do not turn Output wiring is disconnected. Check the output wiring.
ON
ON.
Terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
Output Relays are defective. Replace the Relays.
The output circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
Indicator lights
g are off,, but the outputs
p Output Relays are defective. Replace the Relays.
f particular
for i l Relay
R l numbers b d not
do There is faulty restoration due to Replace the external load or add a
turn OFF. leakage current or residual current. dummy resistor.
Indicators light,
g , and the outputs
p for The output circuit is defective. Replace the Unit.
particular
i l R Relay
l numbers
b d
do not turn The program’s OUT instruction bit Correct the program.
OFF. addresses overlap.
Outputs are turning ON and OFF The load power supply voltage is low. Supply the rated voltage.
irregularly.
The program’s OUT instruction bit Correct the program.
addresses overlap.
There is malfunctioning due to noise. Apply noise countermeasures such as
installing a surge suppressor,
installing an isolation transformer, and
using shielded cables.
Terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
Malfunctioning
g Relays
y are in g
groups
p of Common terminal screws are loose. Tighten the terminal screws.
eight.
i h Terminal block connectors are making Securely lock the connectors, or
poor contact. replace them if necessary.
A fuse is blown. Replace the fuse.
The CPU is defective. Replace the CPU.
Operation is normal, but the output The LED is defective. Replace the Unit.
indicator does not light.

83
 SECTION 7
Inspection and Maintenance
Certain consumable items in a PC (such as fuses, relays, and batteries) need occasional replacement. This section explains
how to replace these items. Always keep spare items on hand so that they can be used as immediate replacements when need-
ed.

7-1 CPU and Power Supply Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

7-2 Output Unit Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7-3 Output Unit Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
7-4 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

85
Output Unit Fuses Section 7-2

7-1 CPU and Power Supply Fuses

Turn counterclockwise
to remove, clockwise to
attach

Standard
screwdriver

To replace a fuse, follow the steps below.

1, 2, 3... 1. Turn OFF the power to the PC.

2. Remove the fuse holder by turning it approximately 50° counterclockwise
with a standard screwdriver.
3. Remove the fuse from the holder.
4. Insert a new fuse.
5. Reattach the fuse holder by turning it approximately 50° clockwise with a
standard screwdriver.

7-2 Output Unit Fuses

To replace a fuse, follow the steps below. Use only UL/CSA certified replace-
ment fuses.
Fuse Specifications (5.2-dia.x20)
Model F indicator (fuse blowout Rating
detection circuit)
C200H-OD411 Yes 5 A 125 V
C200H-OD211 No
C200H-OD212 No 8 A 125 V
C200H-OD213 Yes
C200H-OA121-E Yes 5 A 125 V
C200H-OA122-E Yes
C200H-OA221 Yes 5 A 250 V
C200H-OA222V No 3 A 250 V
C200H-OA223 Yes 5 A 250 V
C200H-OA224 No 3.15 A 250 V

1, 2, 3... 1. Turn OFF the power to the PC.

2. Detach the terminal block by unlocking the lock levers at the top and bottom
of the terminal block.

86
Output Unit Relays Section 7-3

3. While pushing down the lock lever on the Backplane with a screwdriver as
shown below, remove the Output Unit.

4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screw from the top of the Unit.
5. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the case from the Unit.

6. Pull out the printed circuit board.

7. Insert a new fuse. A spare fuse is provided inside the rear of the case when
the Unit is delivered.
8. Reassemble in reverse order of assembly.
Note 1. Use UL or CSA approved fuses if the UL or CSA standards must be satis-
fied. For further details, consult the fuse manufacturer.
2. Fuses in High-density I/O Units cannot be replaced by the user. Refer to
your OMRON dealer for service.

7-3 Output Unit Relays

The following Output Units provide relay sockets that allow the Relays to be re-
placed if they should go bad. Use the Relay listed in the table.
Unit Relay
C200H-OC221 G6B-1174P-FD-US, 24 VDC
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC225
C200H-OC222V G6R-1, 24 VDC
C200H-OC224V
C200H-OC226

87
Output Unit Relays Section 7-3

To replace a Relay, follow the steps below:

1, 2, 3... 1. Turn OFF the power to the PC.

2. Detach the terminal block by unlocking the lock levers at the top and bottom
of the terminal block.
3. While pushing down the lock lever on the Backplane with a screwdriver as
shown below, remove the Output Unit.

4. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screw from the top of the Unit.
5. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, detach the case from the Unit.

6. Pull out the printed circuit board. The Relays are placed on the PC boards of
individual Units as shown in the figures below.

OC221/OC224

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

88
Output Unit Relays Section 7-3

OC222

0
1
2
3
5 4
7 6
9 8
11 10

OC223

0
1
2
3
4

OC225

1 0
3 2
5 4
7 6
9 8
11 10
13 12
15 14

OC222V

0
2 1
4 3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

OC224V

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

89
Batteries Section 7-4

OC226

1 0
3 2
5 4
7 6
9 8
11 10
13 12
15 14

7. A Relay puller is provided inside the rear of the case when the Unit is deliv-
ered. Use the Relay puller to pull out the Relay as shown below. Insert a new
Relay.
Relays for the C200H-OC222V/OC224V/OC226V can be replaced without
using the Relay puller.

Relay puller
Using the Relay puller,
pull the Relay up and out
of the socket.

Printed circuit board

8. Reassemble in reverse order of assembly.

! Caution Check the pin arrangement before inserting a new Relay into the socket. Pins
can only be inserted one way, so do not try to force them if they do not go in easily.
Applying too much force can bend the pins and render them unusable.

7-4 Batteries
! DANGER Batteries can burn, explode, or leak. Absolutely do not short-circuit across the
terminals, attempt to recharge batteries, or take them apart, heat them, or
expose them to fire.

When the battery is nearly discharged, the ALARM indicator blinks and the mes-
sage “BATT FAIL” appears on the Programming Console. When this occurs, re-
place the battery within one week to avoid loss of data.
The normal battery service life is five years at 25°C. The service life will be short-
en if used at temperatures higher than that.
The Battery Fail Flag is allocated to 25308 for the C200HS.
The battery comes together with its connector as a set. To replace the Battery
Set (C200H-BAT09), follow the steps below. The entire replacement must be
completed within five minutes to ensure that the data will not be lost.
1, 2, 3... 1. Turn OFF the power to the PC. (If the power was not already ON, turn the
power ON for at least one minute before turning the power OFF.)

90
Batteries Section 7-4

2. Remove the cover from the battery compartment of the CPU Unit.
3. Remove the old Battery Set.
4. Install the new Battery Set as shown in the following diagram.

Connector

CPU01-E/03-E/01-EC
Battery

5. Replace the cover of the battery compartment.

6. Press CLR, FUN, MONTR, MONTR or just turn the power to the PC OFF
and then ON again to clear the error message on the Programming Con-
sole.

91
 Appendix A
Standard Models

C200HS Racks
Name Specifications Model number
Backplane
p ((same for all Racks)) 10 slots C200H-BC101-V2
8 slots C200H-BC081-V2
5 slots C200H-BC051-V2
3 slots C200H-BC031-V2
CPU Rack CPU 100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC w/built-in --- C200HS-CPU01-E
power supply Conforms to EC C200HS-CPU01-EC
directives (see note)
RS-232C port C200HS-CPU21-E
RS-232C port and C200HS-CPU21-EC
conforms to EC
directives
RS-232C port and C200HS-CPU31-E
SYSMAC NET/
SYSMAC LINK
supported
24 VDC w/built-in power supply Conforms to EC C200HS-CPU03-E
directives (see note)
RS-232C port C200HS-CPU23-E
RS-232C port and C200HS-CPU33-E
SYSMAC NET/
SYSMAC LINK
supported
Memory Cassette EPROM Chip; 27256; 150 ns ROM-JD-B
EPROM Chip; 27512; 150 ns ROM-KD-B
EEPROM; 16K words C200HS-ME16K
EPROM; 16K words C200HS-MP16K
Expansion
p I/O Power Supply
pp y 100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (switchable) C200H-PS221
I/O R k
Racks U i
Unit Conforms to EC C200H-PS221-C
directives
24 VDC Conforms to EC C200H-PS211
directives (see note)
I/O Connectingg 30 cm C200H-CN311
C bl (max.
Cable ( totall 70 cm C200H-CN711
length: 12 m)
2m C200H-CN221
5m C200H-CN521
10 m C200H-CN131
Slave Remote I/O Slave 100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (switchable) APF/ C200H-RT001-P
R k
Racks U i
Unit 24 VDC PCF C200H-RT002-P
100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC (switchable) Wired C200H-RT201
Conforms to EC directives C200H-RT201-C
24 VDC C200H-RT202

Note: Units with lot numbers jjZ5 (Dec. 1995) or later.

93
Standard Models Appendix A

C200H Standard I/O Units

Name Specifications Model number
Input Units AC Input Unit 8 pts 100 to 120 VAC C200H-IA121
16 pts 100 to 120 VAC C200H-IA122/IA122V
8 pts 200 to 240 VAC C200H-IA221
16 pts 200 to 240 VAC C200H-IA222/IA222V
DC Input Unit 8 pts No-voltage contact; NPN C200H-ID001
8 pts No-voltage contact; PNP C200H-ID002
8 pts 12 to 24 VDC C200H-ID211
16 pts 24 VDC C200H-ID212
AC/DC Input Unit 8 pts 12 to 24 VAC/DC C200H-IM211
16 pts 24 VAC/DC C200H-IM212
Interrupt Input Unit1 8 pts 12 to 24 VDC C200HS-INT01
Output Contact Output Unit 8 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC221
Units
12 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC222

16 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VAC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC2252, 3

5 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC223
Independent commons
8 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC224
Independent commons
12 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC222V
16 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC226
8 pts 2 A, 250 VAC/24 VDC (For resistive loads) C200H-OC224V
Independent commons
Triac Output Unit 8 pts 1 A, 120 VAC C200H-OA121-E
8 pts 1.2 A, 120 VAC C200H-OA122-E
8 pts 1.2 A 250 VAC C200H-OA223
12 pts 0.3 A, 250 VAC C200H-OA222V
12 pts 0.5 A, 250 VAC C200H-OA224
Transistor Output
p 8 pts 1 A, 12 to 48 VDC C200H-OD411
U i
Unit 12 pts 0.3 A, 24 VDC C200H-OD211
16 pts 0.3 A, 24 VDC C200H-OD2122
8 pts 2.1 A, 24 VDC C200H-OD213
8 pts 0.8 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load C200H-OD214
short protection
8 pts 5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP) C200H-OD216
12 pts 5 to 24 VDC; source type (PNP) C200H-OD217
16 pts 1.0 A, 24 VDC; source type (PNP); with load C200H-OD21A
short protection
Analog Timer Unit 4 timers 0.1 to 1 s/1 to 10 s/10 to 60 s/1 min to 10 min C200H-TM001
(switchable)
Variable Resistor Connector w/lead wire (2 m) for 1 external resistor C4K-CN223
Connector
Standard B7A Interface Units 16 input Connects to B7A Link Terminals. C200H-B7AI1
pts
16 out- C200H-B7AO1
put pts

94
Standard Models Appendix A

Note 1. If the Interrupt Input Unit is mounted on an Expansion I/O Rack, the interrupt function cannot be used
and the Interrupt Input Unit will be treated as an ordinary 8-point Input Unit. Moreover, Interrupt Input
Units cannot be used on Slave Racks. In addition, Interrupt Input Units require that a version 2 (i.e., mod-
el numbers with a “-V2” suffix) Backplane be used at the CPU Rack. If an earlier version Backplane is
mounted, the interrupt function cannot be used.
2. Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD212/OD21A and Contact Output Unit C200H-OC225 must be
mounted to either a C200H-BC031-V1/V2, C200H-BC051-V1/V2, C200H-BC081-V1/V2, or C200H-
BC101-V1/V2 Backplane.
3. The C200H-OC225 might overheat if more than 8 outputs are turned ON simultaneously.

C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units

Name Specifications Model number
DC Input Unit 64 pts 12 VDC C200H-ID111
32 p
pts 24 VDC C200H-ID216
C200H-ID218
64 p
pts 24 VDC C200H-ID217
C200H-ID219
Transistor Output
p Unit 32 p
pts 16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC C200H-OD218
0.5 A (5 A/Unit) 24 VDC C200H-OD21B
64 pts 16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC C200H-OD219

C200H Group-2 B7A Interface Units

Name Specifications Model number
Group-2
p B7A Interface Units 32 input pts Connects to B7A Link C200H-B7A12
32 output pts T
Terminals.
i l C200H-B7A02
16 input pts and 16 output points C200H-B7A21
32 input pts and 32 output points C200H-B7A22

C200H Special I/O Units

All of the following are classified as Special I/O Units except for the ASCII Unit, which is an Intelligent I/O Unit.
Name Specifications Model number
High-den- DC Input Unit 32 pts 5 VDC (TTL inputs); with high-speed input function C200H-ID501
sity I/O
Units
32 pts 24 VDC; with high-speed inputs C200H-ID215
Transistor 32 pts 0.1 A, 24 VDC (usable as 128-point dynamic output unit) C200H-OD215
Output Unit
32 pts 35 mA, 5 VDC (TTL outputs) (usable as 128-point dy- C200H-OD501
namic output unit)
DC Input/ 16 input/ 12-VDC inputs; with high-speed input function C200H-MD115
Transistor 16 output pts 0.1 A , 12-VDC outputs (usable as 128-point dynamic in-
Output Unit put unit)
16 input/ 24-VDC inputs; with high-speed input function C200H-MD215
16 output pts 0.1 A , 24-VDC outputs (usable as 128-point dynamic in-
put unit)
16 input/ 5 VDC (TTL inputs); with high speed input function 35 C200H-MD501
16 output pts mA, 5 VDC Output (TTL outputs) (usable as 128-point
dynamic input unit)

95
Standard Models Appendix A

Name Specifications Model number

Analog I/O Analog Input 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10 V (switchable); 4 inputs C200H-AD001
Units Unit
4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10/–10 to 10 V (switchable); 8 inputs C200H-AD002
Analog 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5/0 to 10 V (switchable); 2 outputs C200H-DA001
Output Unit
4 to 20 mA, –10 to 10 V; 4 outputs C200H-DA002
Temperature Sensor Unit Thermocouple (K(CA) or J(IC)) (switchable); 4 inputs C200H-TS001
Thermocouple (K(CA) or L(Fe-CuNi)) (switchable); 4 inputs C200H-TS002
Platinum resistance thermometer (JPt) (switchable), DIN standards; C200H-TS101
4 inputs
Platinum resistance thermometer (Pt) (switchable); 4 inputs C200H-TS102
Temperature Control Unit Thermocou- Transistor output C200H-TC001
l
ple Voltage output C200H-TC002
Current output C200H-TC003
Pt resis- Transistor output C200H-TC101
tance ther-
mometer Voltage output C200H-TC102
Current output C200H-TC103
Heat/Cool Temperature Thermocou- Transistor output C200H-TV001
Control Unit ple
p e
Voltage output C200H-TV002
Current output C200H-TV003
Pt resis- Transistor output C200H-TV101
tance ther-
mometer Voltage output C200H-TV102
Current output C200H-TV103
PID Control Unit Transistor output C200H-PID01
Voltage output C200H-PID02
Current output C200H-PID03
Position Control Unit 1 axis Pulse output; speeds: 1 to 99,990 pps C200H-NC111
1 axis Directly connectable to servomotor driver; compatible C200H-NC112
with line driver; speeds: 1 to 250,000 pps
2 axis 1 to 250000. pps. 53 pts per axis C200H-NC211
Cam Positioner Unit Detects angles of rotation by means of a resolver and provides ON and C200H-CP114
OFF outputs at specified angles. A maximum of 48 cam outputs (16 ex-
ternal outputs and 32 internal outputs) maximum are available.
High-speed Counter Unit 1 axis Pulse input; counting speed: 50 kcps; C200H-CT001-V1
5 VDC/12 VDC/24 VDC
1 axis Pulse input; counting speed: 75 kcps; C200H-CT002
RS-422 line driver
ASCII Unit EEPROM C200H-ASC02
Connecting For connecting the ASCII Unit to the FIT10 (9P/25P) CV500-CN228
Cable Cable length: 2 m
I/D Sensor Unit Local application, electromagnetic coupling C200H-IDS01-V1
Remote application, microwave transmissions C200H-IDS21
Read/Write Electromagnetic type V600-H series
H d
Head Microwave type V620-H series
Data Carrier SRAM type for V600-H series. V600-DjjRjj
(
(see note)) EEPROM type for V600-H series. V600-DjjPjj
Voice Unit 60 messages max.; message length: 32, 48, or 64 s (switchable) C200H-OV001
Connecting RS-232C C200H-CN224
Cable

96
Standard Models Appendix A

Name Specifications Model number

Fuzzy Logic Unit Up to 8 inputs and 4 outputs. (I/O to and from specified data area words) C200H-FZ001
Fuzzy Available on either 3.5” or 5.25” floppy disks. C500-SU981-E
Support
Software

Note For Read/Write Head and Data Carrier combinations, refer to the V600 FA ID System R/W Heads and EE-
PROM Data Carriers Operation Manual and Supplement or V600 FA ID System R/W Heads and SRAM
Data Carriers Operation Manual and Supplement.

C200H Link Units

Name Specifications Model number
Host Link Unit Rack-mounting C200H only APF/PCF C200H-LK101-PV1
RS-422 C200H-LK202-V1
RS-232C C200H-LK201-V1
PC Link Unit Multilevel RS-485 C200H-LK401
Remote I/O Master Unit Up to two per PC; connectable to up to 5 APF/PCF C200H-RM001-PV1
Slaves per PC total
Wired C200H-RM201

SYSMAC LINK Unit/SYSMAC NET Link Units

The SYSMAC LINK Units and SYSMAC NET Link Unit can only be used with the C200HS-CPU31-E and C200HS-
CPU33-E CPUs.
Name Specifications Model number
SYSMAC LINK Unit Wired via coaxial cable. Data link C200HW-SLK23
Bus Connection Unit required separately. One capacity:
C1000H-CE001 F Adapter p included. 918 words
Data link C200HW-SLK24
capacity:
2,966 words
Wired via optical fiber cable. Data link C200HW-SLK13
Bus Connection Unit required separately. An capacity:
p
Optical Fiber Cable Bracket must be used to 918 words
supportt an optical
ti l cable
bl connected
t d to
t the
th Data link C200HW-SLK14
SYSMAC LINK Unit. capacity:
2,966 words
Terminator One required for each node at ends of System C1000H-TER01
Attachment Stirrup Provided with SYSMAC LINK Unit C200H-TL001
F Adapter --- C1000H-CE001
F Adapter Cover --- C1000H-COV01
Communications Coaxial cables Manufactured by Hitachi ECXF5C-2V
C bl
Cable Manufactured by Fujigura 5C-2V
Auxiliary Power Sup- Supplies backup power to either one or two SYSMAC LINK C200H-APS03
ply Unit Units. One C200H-CN111 Power Connecting Cable included.
SYSMAC NET Link Unit Bus Connection Unit required separately. An Optical Fiber C200HS-SNT32
Cable Bracket must be used to support an optical cable con-
nected to the SYSMAC NET Link Unit.
Power Supply
pp y Adapt-
p Required
q when supplying
pp y g ppower from Central For 1 Unit C200H-APS01
er P
Power S l
Supply For 2 Units C200H-APS02
Power Cable Connects Power Supply
pp y Adapter
p and SYS- For 1 Unit C200H-CN111
MAC NET Link
Li k Unit
U i For 2 Units C200H-CN211

97
Standard Models Appendix A

Name Specifications Model number

Bus Connection Unit Connects SYSMAC LINK Unit or SYSMAC For 1 Unit C200H-CE001
Li k U
NET Link i to C200HS
Unit CPU31 E/CPU33 E
C200HS-CPU31-E/CPU33-E For 2 Units C200H-CE002

CompoBus Units
Name Specifications Model number
CompoBus/S Master Unit --- C200HW-SRM21
CompoBus/D (DeviceNet) --- C200HW-DRM21
Master Unit

Optional Products
Name Specifications Model number
I/O Unit Cover Cover for 10-pin terminal block C200H-COV11
Terminal Block Cover Short protection for 10-pin terminal block C200H-COV02
Short protection for 19-pin terminal block C200H-COV03
Connector Cover Protective cover for unused Backplane connectors C500-COV01
Space Unit Used for vacant slots C200H-SP001
Battery Set For C200H RAM Memory Unit only C200H-BAT09
Relay 24 VDC G6B-1174P-FD-US DC24
G6R-1
Backplane Insulation Plate For 10-slot Backplane C200H-ATTA1
For 8-slot Backplane C200H-ATT81
For 5-slot Backplane C200H-ATT51
For 3-slot Backplane C200H-ATT31
I/O Bracket For 10-slot Backplane C200H-ATTA3
For 8-slot Backplane C200H-ATT83
For 5-slot Backplane C200H-ATT53
For 3-slot Backplane C200H-ATT33

Note 1. When ordering, specify the model name (any component of which is not sold separately).
2. Order the press-fit tool from the manufacturer.

Mounting Rails and Accessories

Name Specifications Model number
DIN Track Mounting Bracket 1 set (2 included) C200H-DIN01
DIN Track Length: 50 cm; height: 7.3 mm PFP-50N
Length: 1 m; height: 7.3 mm PFP-100N
Length: 1 m; height: 16 mm PFP-100N2
End Plate --- PFP-M
Spacer --- PFP-S

98
Standard Models Appendix A

Link Adapters
Name Specifications Model number
Link Adapter 3 RS-422 connectors 3G2A9-AL001
3 optical connectors (APF/PCF) 3G2A9-AL002-PE
3 optical connectors (PCF) 3G2A9-AL002-E
1 connector each for APF/PCF, RS-422, and RS-232C 3G2A9-AL004-PE
1 connector each for PCF, RS-422, and RS-232C 3G2A9-AL004-E
1 connector each for APF/PCF and APF 3G2A9-AL005-PE
1 connector each for PCF and AGF 3G2A9-AL005-E
1 connector for APF/PCF; 2 for AGF 3G2A9-AL006-PE
O/E converter; 1 connector for RS-485, 1 connector each for APF/PCF B500-AL007-PE
Used for on-line removal of SYSMAC NET Link Units from the SYSMAC B700-AL001
NET Link System, SYSMAC NET Optical Link Adapter 3 connectors for
APF/PCF.

SYSMAC BUS/SYSMAC WAY Optical Fiber Products

Plastic Clad Optical Fiber Cable/All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable
Name Specifications Model number
Plastic Clad Optical Fiber Cable 0.1 m, w/connectors Ambient temp: 3G5A2-OF011
(indoor) –10°
10° to 70°C
1 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF101
2 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF201
3 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF301
5 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF501
10 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF111
20 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF211
30 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF311
40 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF411
50 m, w/connectors 3G5A2-OF511
Cable only; order desired length between 1 B500-OF002
and 200 m in increments of 1 m.
All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable Cable only; order desired length in 5 m increments between B500-PF002
5 and 100 m, or in increments of 200 m or 500 m.
Optical Connectors A Two optical connectors (brown) for APF (10 m max.) 3G5A2-CO001
Optical Connectors B Two optical connectors (black) for APF (8 to 20 m) 3G5A2-CO002
All Plastic Optical Fiber Cable Set 1-m cable with an Optical Connector A connected to each 3G5A2-PF101
end
Optical Fiber Processing Kit Accessory: 125-mm nipper (Muromoto Tekko’s 550M) for 3G2A9-TL101
APF

99
Standard Models Appendix A

H-PCF
Name Specifications Model number
Optical Fiber Cable 10 m, black Two-core cable S3200-HCCB101
SYSMAC BUS BUS, SYSMAC WAY
50 m, black S3200-HCCB501
100 m, black S3200-HCCB102
500 m, black S3200-HCCB502
1000 m, black S3200-HCCB103
10 m, orange S3200-HCCO101
50 m, orange S3200-HCCO501
100 m, orange S3200-HCCO102
500 m, orange S3200-HCCO502
1000 m, orange S3200-HCCO103
10 m, black Two-core cable S3200-HBCB101
50 m, black S3200-HBCB501
100 m, black S3200-HBCB102
500 m, black S3200-HBCB502
1000 m, black S3200-HBCB103
Optical Fiber Cable Connector SYSMAC BUS: Half-lock connector S3200-COCH82
C200H-RM001-PV1 for Remote I/O Mas-
C200H-RT001/RT002-P ter, Remote I/O
C500-RM001-(P)V1 Slave, Host Link
C500-RT001/RT002-(P)V1 Unit, and Link
B500-jjj(-P) Adapter

Note 1. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.

2. If the user prepares and connects optical fiber cables, the user must take a seminar held under the aus-
pices of Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd. and obtain a proper certificate.
3. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber Set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required
to connect optical fiber cables.
Optical Fiber Assembling Tool
Name Specifications Model number
Optical Fiber Assembling Tool Used to connect H-PCF and crimp-cut connectors for opti- S3200-CAK1062
cal transmission systems such as the SYSMAC C- and
CV-series SYSMAC BUS, SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC
NET.

Note 1. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.

2. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required
to connect optical fiber cables.
Optical Power Tester
Name Specifications Head Unit Model number
Optical Power Tester (see note) SYSMAC BUS: S3200-CAT2822 S3200-CAT2820
(provided with a connector adapter, C200H-RM001-PV1 (provided with the
light source unit, small single-head C200H-RT001/RT002-P Tester)
plug, hard case, and AC adapter) C500-RM001-(P)V1
C500-RT001/RT002-(P)V1
Note: There is no difference between the light source unit and connector adapter for the Head Unit and those for
the Optical Power Tester.

100
Standard Models Appendix A

Head Unit
Name Specifications Model number
Head Unit (a set consisting of light SYSMAC BUS: S3200-CAT2822
source unit and connector adapter) C200H-RM001-PV1
(see note) C200H-RT001/RT002-P
SYSMAC NET: S3200-CAT3202
S3200-LSU03-V1/LSU03-01E
C500-SNT31-V4
3G8FX-TM111
3G8SX-TM111
Note: Use a proper Head Unit model for the optical module to be used. If two types of optical modules (unit type
and board type) are used, order an Optical Power Tester plus a proper Head Unit model.
Master Fiber Set
Name Specifications Model number
Master Fiber Set (1 m) S3200-CAT3202 (SYSMAC NET, NSB, NSU, Bridge) S3200-CAT3201
S3200-CAT2002/CAT2702 (SYSMAC NET, SYSMAC S3200-CAT2001H
LINK)
S3200-CAT2822 (SYSMAC BUS) S3200-CAT2821

Note 1. The Master Fiber Set is used in combination with the Optical Power Tester to check the optical levels of
optical fiber cables connected to optical fiber cable connectors.
2. Optical fiber cables must be prepared and connected by specialists.
3. The Optical Power Tester, Head Unit, Master Fiber set, and Optical Fiber Assembling Tool are required
to connect optical fiber cables.

SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link Optical Fiber Products

Optical Fiber Cables for SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET Link Systems
Use hard-plastic-clad quartz optical fiber (H-PCF) cables for SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET Link Systems.
H-PCF cables are available with connectors already attached, or cables and connectors can be purchased sepa-
rately and assembled by the user. Refer to the System Manual for the SYSMAC LINK or SYSMAC NET Link Sys-
tems for assembly procedures. Models numbers for H-PCF cables with connecters attached are provided in the
following illustration.
Model Numbers for H-PCF Cables with Connectors

S3200-CNjjj-jj-jj

Cable length Connectors

201: 2m 20-25: Full-lock connector on
501: 5m one end, half-lock con-
102: 10 m nector on other end.
152: 15 m 25-25: Half-lock connectors
202: 20 m on both ends.
Blank: Over 20 m
(Specify.)

An Optical Fiber Cable Bracket must be used to support an optical fiber cable connected to the C200HS-SNT32
SYSMAC NET Link Unit or C200HW-SLK13/SLK14 SYSMAC LINK Unit.
User optical fiber cables with both tension members and power supply lines.
The following half-lock connector is used and connects to the C200HS SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET Link
Units: S3200-COCF2511.
The following full-lock connector is used and connects to the CV500 SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET Link Units
and the C1000H SYSMAC LINK Unit: S3200-COCF2011. This full-lock connector cannot be connected to the
C200HS SYSMAC LINK and SYSMAC NET Link Units.
The above connectors cannot be used for the C500 SYSMAC NET Link Unit, cable relays, and the SYSMAC NET
Link Network Service Board. Refer to the SYSMAC NET Link System Manual for further information.

101
Standard Models Appendix A

Programming Devices
Name Specifications Model number
Programming Console Hand-held, w/backlight; requires the C200H-CN222 or C200H-PR027-E
C200H-CN422, see below
2-m Connecting Cable attached. CQM1-PRO01-E
Programming Console Used to attach Hand-held Programming Console to a panel. C200H-ATT01
Mounting Bracket
Programming Console Con- For Hand-held Programming Console 2m C200H-CN222
necting Cables
4m C200H-CN422

Provided with an anti-static cover 2m C200HS-CN222

and
d conforms
f tto EC di
directives.
ti 4m C200HS-CN422
Data Setting Console Used for data input and process value display for the C200H-DSC01
C200H-TCjjj, C200H-TVjjj, C200H-CP114, and
C200H-PID0j.
Data Setting Console For C200H-DSC01 2m C200H-CN225
Connecting Cables
4m C200H-CN425

Connecting Cable Used to connect an IBM PC/AT or com- 3.3 m CQM1-CIF02

patible to the C200HS.

Ladder Support Software (LSS)

Name Specifications Model number
Ladder Support Software (for 5.25”, 2D for IBM PC/AT compatible C500-SF711-EV3
C20,
C CjjP,, Cjj
0, Cjj CjjK,, CC120,0,
CjjH, C200H, C200HS, C500, 3.5”, 2HD for IBM PC/AT compatible C500-SF312-EV3
C1000H, C2000H, and CQM1)

SYSMAC Support Software (SSS)

Product Description Model no.
SYSMAC Support Software 3.5”, 2HD for IBM PC/AT compatible C500-ZL3AT1-E

Training Materials
Name Specifications Model number
SYSMAC Training System Includes text book, cassette tape, and input switch C200H-ETL01-E
board.
Fuzzy Training System Includes a Fuzzy Training System Manual, a Main Unit, C200H-ETL13-E
a C200H-MR831 Memory Unit, a C200H-PRO27-E
Programming Console, a C200H-CN222 Cable for the
Programming Console, C500-SU381-E Fuzzy Training
Software, an RS-232C Cable, and a carrying belt.

102
 Appendix B
Specifications

The following figures and tables provide specifications for each Unit of the C200HS. I/O Units may take on one of
three different shapes and are sometimes referred to as A-shape Units, B-shape Units, or E-shape Units. Group-2
High-density I/O Units take on one of two different shapes and are sometimes referred to as C-shape Units or
D-shape Units. Refer to the figures at the end of the I/O Unit specifications for the exact dimensions of these five
shapes of I/O Unit.

CPUs and Power Supplies

General Specifications
Item C200HS-CPU01-E/CPU01-EC/CPU21-E/ C200HS-CPU03-E/CPU23-E/
CPU21-EC/CPU31-E, CPU33-E, C200H-PS211
C200H-PS221/PS221-C
Supply Voltage 100 to 120/200 to 240 VAC selectable 24 VDC
50/60 Hz
Operating Voltage Range 85 to 132/170 to 264 VAC 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Power Consumption 120 VA max. 40 W max.
Surge Current 30 A max. 30 A max.
Output Capacity CPU01-E/CPU01-EC/CPU21-E/CPU21-EC/CPU31-E:
4.6 A, 5 VDC (3.9 A supplied to I/O Units)
CPU03-E/CPU23-E/CPU33-E: 3 A, 5 VDC (2.3 A supplied to I/O Units)
Expansion I/O Rack: 3 A, 5 VDC (2.7 A supplied to I/O Units)
Fuse 2 A 250 V 5.2 dia. x 20 (MF51NR) 2 A 125 V 5.2 dia. x 20 (MF51NR)
24 VDC Output 0.3 A, 24 VDC +10%/–20% None
Insulation Resistance 20 MΩ between AC terminals and the GR (See note 2.)
terminal at 500 VDC (See note 1.)
Dielectric Strength 2,300 VAC at 50/60 Hz for 1 minute (See note 2.)
between AC terminals and housing;
1,000 VAC at 50/60 Hz for 1 minute
between DC terminals and housing.
Leakage current: 10 mA max. (See note 1.)
Noise Immunity 1,500 Vp-p, pulse width: 100 ns to 1 µs, rise time: 1 ns pulse (by noise simulator)
Vibration JIS C0911 conforming,10 to 57 Hz; 0.075 mm amplitude, 57 to 150 Hz; acceleration:
9.8 m/s2 (see note 3), in X, Y, and Z directions, for 80 minutes each (sweep time 8 min x
10 sweeps = 80 min); (When mounted on DIN track, 2 to 55 Hz, 2.94 m/s2, in X, Y, and Z
directions, for 20 minutes each)
Shock JIS C0912 conforming, 147 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions, 3 times each
Ambient Temperature Operating: 0° to 55°C; storage: –20° to 75°C (without battery)
Humidity 10% to 90% (without condensation)
Atmosphere Must be free of the following:
• Corrosive gases
• Abrupt temperature changes
• Direct sunlight
• Dust, salt, or metal filings
• Water, oil, or chemicals
Grounding Connect to a ground of 100 Ω or less
Enclosure Rating Mounted in a panel
Weight 6 kg max.
Note 1. Internal components might be damaged if insulation resistance or dielectric strength tests are con-
ducted with the LG and GR terminals connected.
2. Do not conduct a dielectric strength test on the C200HS-CPU03-E/CPU23-E/CPU33-E, PS211,
RT002-P, or RT202 Units. The power supply input line and internal circuit of the 24 VDC Power Supply

103
Specifications Appendix B

are not isolated from each other. If a dielectric strength test is conducted at 50 VDC or higher, internal
components such as capacitors will be damaged. If a short-circuit test must be conducted, use a device
such as a tester.
3.
Acceleration (G)

Amplitude
0.075 mm

10 57 150
Frequency (Hz)

C200HS Dimensions
M4

130 118 (135)

6.5 A 7.5 D

Backplane A W D
CPU01-E/CPU01-EC/ CPU21-E/CPU21-EC/
CPU03-E CPU23-E/CPU31-E/
CPU33-E
C200H-BC031-V2 246 260 118 143
C200H-BC051-V2 316 330
C200H-BC081-V2 421 435
C200H-BC101-V2 491 505

Note 1. All units are in millimeters.

2. For dimensions of individual units and Backplane, refer to page 193 onward.

104
Specifications Appendix B

CPU Specifications
Control Method Stored program
I/O Control Cyclic scan and immediate processing are both possible.
Method
Programming Ladder diagram
Method
Instruction Length 1 address/instruction, 1 to 4 words/instruction
Number of CPU01-E/01-EC/03-E/21-E/23-E: 225 (14 basic instructions + 211 special instructions)
Instructions CPU31-E/33-E: 229 (14 basic instructions + 215 special instructions)
Execution Time Basic instructions: 0.375 to 1.313 µs Special instructions: Approx. 10 µs
Program Capacity 15.2K words max.
IR Area: I/O bits 480 bits I/O bits for I/O bits for I/O Units I/O bits for I/O bits for
(00000 through 02915) Group-2 mounted to Slave Special I/O Optical I/O
High-density Racks: 800 bits Units: 1,600 Units: 512 bits
Units and (05000 through bits (10000 (20000 through
Group 2 B7A
Group-2 09915) through 19915) 23115)
IR Area: Work bits 6,688 bits Interface
(03000 through 23515, Units: 320
30000 through 51115) bits (03000
through
04915)
SR bits 1,016 (23600 through 25507 and 25600 through 29915)
TR bits 8 (TR 0 through 7)
HR bits 1,600 (HR 0000 through 9915)
AR bits 448 (AR 0000 through 2715)
LR bits 1,024 (LR 0000 through 6315)
Timers/Counters 512 (TIM/CNT 000 through 511) TIMs: 0 through 999.9 s
TIMHs: 0 through 99.99 s CNT: 0 through 9999 counts
DM words Read/write: 6,144 (DM 0000 through 6143)
Read only: 512 (DM 6144 through 6655)
3,000 words max. (DM 7000 through 9999)
RUN Output Contacts are closed while PC is in RUN mode and operating.
Max. switching capacity: 2A 250 VAC (resistive load)
0.5 A 250 VAC (inductive load, cosφ = 0.4)
2 A 24 VDC
Power Failure Holds HR, AR, CNT, and DM, and clock (RTC) contents.
Backup Function
Clock Function Standard
Memory Backup The battery service life is five years at 25°C. The service life will be shortened if the battery is used
Time at higher temperatures.
Replace the battery within one week after the battery alarm indicator starts blinking. When
replacing the battery, install the new battery within five minutes after removing the old one.
Self-diagnostic CPU errors (watchdog timer), I/O verification errors, host link errors, memory errors, battery errors,
Function I/O bus errors, remote I/O errors, etc.
Program Check Carries out program checks at the beginning of operation for items such as no END instruction,
Function instruction errors, and so on.

105
Specifications Appendix B

Standard I/O Units

AC Input Unit C200H-IA121
Rated Input Voltage 100 to 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Operating Input Voltage 85 to 132 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance 9.7 kW (50 Hz), 8 kW (60 Hz)
Input Current 10 mA typical (at 100 VAC)
ON Voltage 60 VAC min.
OFF Voltage 20 VAC max.
ON Response Time 35 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 55 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 0.33 mF 470 W
100 to
120 VAC
Internal
330 kW Circuit
COM 910 W

Input indicator

Terminal Connections
0
A0
1
A1
2
A2
3
100 to A3
120 VAC 4
A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
COM
A8
NC A9

106
Specifications Appendix B

AC Input Unit C200H-IA122/IA122V

Rated Input Voltage 100 to 120 VAC 50/60 Hz
Operating Input Voltage 85 to 132 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance 9.7 kW (50 Hz), 8 kW (60 Hz)
Input Current 10 mA typical (at 100 VAC)
ON Voltage 60 VAC min.
OFF Voltage 20 VAC max.
ON Response Time 35 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 55 ms max. (at 100 VAC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max./400 g max. (IA122V)
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 0.33 mF 470 W
100 to
120 VAC
Internal
330 kW Circuit
COM 910 W

Input indicator

Terminal Connections

0
1 B0
A0 2
3 B1
A1 4
5 B2
A2 6
7 B3
100 to A3 8
120 VAC 9 B4
A4
11 B5 10
A5
13 B6 12
A6
15 B7 14
A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

107
Specifications Appendix B

AC Input Unit C200H-IA221

Rated Input Voltage 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Operating Input Voltage 170 to 264 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance 21 kW (50 Hz), 18 kW (60 Hz)
Input Current 10 mA typical (at 200 VAC)
ON Voltage 120 VAC min.
OFF Voltage 40 VAC max.
ON Response Time 35 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 55 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 0.15 mF 820 Ω
200 to
240 VAC
Internal
680 kW Circuit
COM 910 Ω

Input indicator

Terminal Connections
0
A0
1
A1
2
A2
3
200 to A3
240 VAC 4
A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
COM
A8
NC A9

108
Specifications Appendix B

AC Input Unit C200H-IA222/IA222V

Rated Input Voltage 200 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz
Operating Input Voltage 170 to 264 VAC 50/60 Hz
Input Impedance 21 kW (50 Hz), 18 kW (60 Hz)
Input Current 10 mA typical (at 200 VAC)
ON Voltage 120 VAC min.
OFF Voltage 40 VAC max.
ON Response Time 35 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 55 ms max. (at 200 VAC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max./400 g max. (IA222V)
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 0.15 mF 680 Ω
200 to
240 VAC
Internal
680 kW Circuit
COM 910 Ω

Input indicator

Terminal Connections

0
1 B0
A0 2
3 B1
A1 4
5 B2
A2 6
7 B3
200 to A3 8
240 VAC 9 B4
A4
11 B5 10
A5
13 B6 12
A6
15 B7 14
A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

109
Specifications Appendix B

No-Voltage Contact Input Unit C200H-ID001

Input Voltage No-voltage contact/NPN output type (negative
common)
Input Impedance 3 kW
Input Current 7 mA typical
ON Voltage (14.4 VDC min.)
OFF Voltage (5.0 VDC max.)
ON Response Time 1.5 ms max. (no-voltage contact, at 25°C)
OFF Response Time 1.5 ms max. (no-voltage contact, at 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 200 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration

Current IN

IN 3 kW

0.01 1.8 Internal

mF kW Circuit
COM

Input indicator

0.3 A
24 VDC + Internal 24-VDC
– power supply

Power CPU, Expansion I/O Power Supply,

supply Remote I/O Slave Unit

Note The power is supplied to the Input Units from the 24 VDC output of the Power Supply of the CPU, Expansion
I/O Unit, or Remote I/O Unit. Never connect 24 VDC output terminals to the input terminals or COM termi-
nals.

Terminal Connections

0
A0
1
A1
2
A2
3
A3
Current 4
(NPN output) A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
COM
A8
NC A9

110
Specifications Appendix B

No-Voltage Contact Input Unit C200H-ID002

Input Voltage No-voltage contact/PNP output type (positive
common)
Input Impedance 3 kW
Input Current 7 mA typical
ON Voltage (14.4 VDC min.)
OFF Voltage (5.0 VDC max.)
ON Response Time 1.5 ms max. (no-voltage contact, at 25°C)
OFF Response Time 1.5 ms max. (no-voltage contact, at 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 200 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration

IN

IN 3 kW

0.01 1.8 Internal

mF kW Circuit
COM

Current

Input indicator

0.3 A + Internal 24-VDC

24 VDC
– power supply

Power CPU, Expansion I/O Power Supply,

supply Remote I/O Slave Unit

Note The power is supplied to the Input Units from the 24 VDC output of the Power Supply of the CPU, Expansion
I/O Unit, or Remote I/O Unit. Never connect 24 VDC output terminals to the input terminals or COM termi-
nals.

Terminal Connections

0
A0
1
A1
2
A2
3
A3
Current 4
(PNP output) A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
COM
A8
NC A9

111
Specifications Appendix B

DC Input Unit C200H-ID211

Rated Input Voltage 12 to 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 2 kW
Input Current 10 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 10.2 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 1.5 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 1.5 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (8 point/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 200 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 2 kW

0.01 1.8 Internal

mF kW Circuit
COM

12 to 24 VDC

Input indicator

Terminal Connections
0
A0
1
A1
2
A2
3
A3
12 to 24 VDC 4
A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
COM
A8
NC A9

112
Specifications Appendix B

DC Input Unit C200H-ID212

Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 3 kW
Input Current 7 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 1.5 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 1.5 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 3 kW

0.01 1.8 Internal

mF kW Circuit
COM

24 VDC

Input indicator

Terminal Connections

B0 0
1
A0 2
3 B1
A1 4
5 B2
A2 6
7 B3
A3 8
24 VDC 9 B4
A4
11 B5 10
A5
13 B6 12
A6
15 B7 14
A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

113
Specifications Appendix B

AC/DC Input Unit C200H-IM211

Rated Input Voltage 12 to 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 10.2 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 2 kW
Input Current 10 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 10.2 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 15 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 15 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 200 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 2 kW

1.8 Internal
0.01
kW
COM mF Circuit

12 to
24 VAC/DC

Input indicator

Terminal Connections
0
A0
1
A1
2
A2
3
A3
12 to 4
24 VAC/DC A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
COM
A8
NC A9

114
Specifications Appendix B

AC/DC Input Unit C200H-IM212

Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 3 kW
Input Current 7 mA typical (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 15 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 15 ms max. (at 24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 3 kW

1.8 Internal
0.01
kW
COM mF Circuit

24 VAC/DC

Input indicator

Terminal Connections

0
1 B0
A0 2
3 B1
A1 4
5 B2
A2 6
7 B3
24 VAC/DC A3 8
9 B4
A4
11 B5 10
A5
13 B6 12
A6
15 B7 14
A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

115
Specifications Appendix B

Triac Output Unit C200H-OA121-E

Max. switching capacity 1 A 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/Unit)
Min. switching capacity 10 mA (resistive load)/40 mA (inductive load)
10 VAC
Leakage Current 3 mA (100 VAC) max.
Residual Voltage 1.2 V max.
ON Response Time 1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1/2 of load frequency or less.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L
Output LED
indicator OUT
L

Internal
circuit Fuse COM
120 VAC max.
Fuse blowout
detection circuit

F indicator

Fuse: 5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20) GGS (Nagasawa)

Note When the fuse blows, F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through15 cannot be used as IR bits.

Terminal Connections

0
L A0
1
L A1
2
L A2
3
L A3
120 VAC max. 4
(1 A max. 4 A/Unit)
L A4
5
L A5
6
L A6
7
L A7
COM A8
NC A9

116
Specifications Appendix B

Triac Output Unit C200H-OA122-E

Max. Switching Capacity 1.2 A 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/Unit)
Max. Inrush Current 15 A (pulse width: 100 ms)
30 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
Min. Switching Capacity 100 mA 10 VAC/50 mA 24 VAC/10 mA 100 VAC
min.
Leakage Current 1.5 mA (120 VAC) max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 VAC max. (50 to 1,200 mA)/ 5 VAC max. (10 to
50 mA)
ON Response Time 1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1/2 of load frequency+1 ms or less.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions E-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L

Output indicator OUT

L

Internal
Circuit Fuse COM

120 VAC max.

Fuse blowout
detection circuit

F indicator

Fuse: 5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20) GGS (Nagasawa)

Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.

Terminal Connections

L 0 A0
L 1 A1
L 2 A2
L 3 A3
120 VAC max. 4
(1.2 A max. 4 A/Unit) L A4
L 5 A5
L 6 A6
L 7 A7
COM A8
NC A9

117
Specifications Appendix B

Triac Output Unit C200H-OA222V

Max. Switching Capacity 0.3 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (2 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA (resistive load)/40 mA (inductive load)
10 VAC
Leakage Current 3 mA (100 VAC) max./6 mA (200 VAC) max.
Residual Voltage 1.2 V max.
ON Response Time 1/2 of load frequency or less.
OFF Response Time 1/2 of load frequency or less.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 200 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 3 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight 400 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L

Output indicator OUT

L

Internal
Circuit Fuse COM

250 VAC max.

Fuse: 3 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) MQ4 (SOC)

Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.

2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections

0
1 B0 L
L A0 2
3 B1 L
L A1 4
5 B2 L
L A2 6
7 B3 L
L A3 8
9 B4 L
L A4 10
11 B5 L
L A5
B6 NC
NC A6
250 VAC max. B7 NC
(0.3 A max., 2 A/Unit) NC A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

118
Specifications Appendix B

Triac Output Unit C200H-OA223

Max. Switching Capacity 1.2 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (4 A/Unit)
Max. Inrush Current 15 A (pulse width: 100 ms)
30 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
Min. Switching Capacity 100 mA 10 VAC/50 mA 24 VAC/10 mA 100 VAC
min.
Leakage Current 1.5 mA (120 VAC) max./3 mA (240 VAC) max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 VAC max. (50 to 1,200 mA)/ 5 VAC max. (10 to
50 mA)
ON Response Time 1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1/2 of load frequency+1 ms or less.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 5 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions E-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L

Output indicator OUT

L

Internal
Circuit Fuse COM

250 VAC max.

Fuse blowout
detection circuit

F indicator

Fuse: 5 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) HT (SOC)

Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.

Terminal Connections

L 0 A0
L 1 A1
L 2 A2
L 3 A3
250 VAC max. 4
(1.2 A max. 4 A/Unit) L A4
L 5 A5
L 6 A6
L 7 A7
COM A8
NC A9

119
Specifications Appendix B

Triac Output Unit C200H-OA224

Max. Switching Capacity 0.5 A 250 VAC, 50/60 Hz (2 A/Unit)
Max. Inrush current 10 A (pulse width: 100ms)
20 A (pulse width: 10 ms)
Min. Switching Capacity 100 mA 10 VAC/50 mA 24 VAC/10 mA 100 VAC
min.
Leakage Current 1.5 mA (120 VAC) max./3 mA (240 VAC) max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 VAC max. (50 to 500 mA)/5 VAC max. (10 to
50 mA)
ON Response Time 1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1/2 of load frequency + 1 ms or less.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 270 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 3.15 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L

Output indicator OUT

L

Internal
Circuit Fuse COM

250 VAC max.

Fuse: 3.15 A 250 V (5.2-dia.x20) MT4 (SOC)

Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.

2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections

0
1 B0 L
L A0 2
3 B1 L
L A1 4
5 B2 L
L A2 6
7 B3 L
L A3 8
9 B4 L
L A4 10
11 B5 L
L A5
B6 NC
NC A6
250 VAC max. B7 NC
(0.5 A max., 2 A/Unit) NC A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

120
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC221

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay G6B-1174P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 10 ms max.
OFF Response Time 10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

Terminal Connections
0
L A0
1
L A1
2
L A2
3
L A3
4
L A4
5
L A5
6
L A6
7
L A7
COM
A8

NC A9

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

121
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC222

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay G6B-1174P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 10 ms max.
OFF Response Time 10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L

Internal
Circuit
COM

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

Terminal Connections

0
1 B0 L
L A0 2
3 B1 L
L A1 4
5 B2 L
L A2 6
7 B3 L
L A3 8
9 B4 L
A4
L
11 B5 10 L
L A5
B6 NC
NC A6
B7 NC
NC A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

122
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC223

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (10 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay G6B-1174-P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 10 ms max.
OFF Response Time 10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 5 independent contacts
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator
OUT
L

Internal
Circuit
OUTc

250 VAC 24
VDC max.

Terminal Connections
0
L A0
c0
A1
1
L A2
c1
A3
2
L A4
250VAC 24 VDC max. c2
(inductive load: 2 A A5
resistive load: 2 A) 3
(10 A/Unit)
L A6
c3
A7
4
L A8
c4
A9

123
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC224

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (16 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay G6B-1174-P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 10 ms max.
OFF Response Time 10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 8 independent contacts
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
OUTc

250 VAC 24
VDC max.

Terminal Connections

0
c0 B0 L
A0 1
c1 B1 L
A1 2
c2 B2 L
A2 3
c3 B3 L
A3 4
250 VAC 24 c4 B4 L
VDC max. (in- A4 5
ductive load: 2 c5 B5 L
A resistive A5 6
c6 B6 L
load: 2 A) A6 7
(16 A/Unit) c7 B7 L
A7
B8 NC
NC A8
B9 NC

124
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC225

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay G6B-1174P-FD-US (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 500,000 operations (resistive load)/
100,000 operations (inductive load)
Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 10 ms max.
OFF Response Time 10 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
Internal Current Consumption 50 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 400 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM

250 VAC
24 VDC max.

Terminal Connections

0
1 B0 L
L A0
3 B1 2 L
L A1
5 B2 4 L
L A2
7 B3 6 L
A3
L
9 B4 8 L
A4
L
11 B5 10 L
L A5
13 B6 12 L
L A6
15 B7 14 L
L A7
B8 NC
A8
COM B9 NC

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

Note 1. This Unit must be mounted to a C200H-BCjj1-V1/V2 Backplane.

2. This Unit might overheat if more than 8 output points are turned ON simultaneously.

125
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC222V

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay G6R-1 (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 15 ms max.
OFF Response Time 15 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
Internal Current Consumption 8 mA 5 VDC max. 90 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 400 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L

Internal
Circuit
COM

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

Terminal Connections

0
1 B0 L
L A0 2
3 B1 L
L A1 4
5 B2 L
L A2 6
7 B3 L
L A3 8
9 B4 L
A4
L
11 B5 10 L
L A5
B6 NC
NC A6
B7 NC
NC A7
COM B8 NC
A8
B9 NC

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

126
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC226

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (8 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay G6R-1 (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 15 ms max.
OFF Response Time 15 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common) 8 points max. can be ON
simultaneously.
Internal Current Consumption 30 mA 5 VDC max. 90 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 500 g max.
Dimensions Extended B-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
COM

250 VAC
24 VDC max.

Terminal Connections

0
1 B0 L
L A0
3 B1 2 L
L A1
5 B2 4 L
L A2
7 B3 6 L
A3
L
9 B4 8 L
A4
L
11 B5 10 L
L A5
13 B6 12 L
L A6
15 B7 14 L
L A7
B8 NC
A8
COM B9 NC

250 VAC 24 VDC max.

(inductive load: 2 A resistive load: 2 A) (8 A/Unit)

127
Specifications Appendix B

Contact Output Unit C200H-OC224V

Max. Switching Capacity 2 A 250 VAC (cosf = 1), 2 A 250 VAC (cosf =
0.4), 2 A 24 VDC (16 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Relay G6R-1 (24 VDC) w/socket
Service Life of Relay Electrical: 300,000 operations
Mechanical: 10,000,000 operations
ON Response Time 15 ms max.
OFF Response Time 15 ms max.
No. of Circuits 8 independent contacts
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 90 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Weight 350 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal
Circuit
OUTc

250 VAC
24 VDC
max.

Terminal Connections

0
c0 B0 L
A0 1
c1 B1 L
A1 2
c2 B2 L
A2 3
c3 B3 L
A3 4
250 VAC c4 B4 L
24 VDC max. A4 5
(inductive load: c5 B5 L
2 A resistive A5 6
c6 B6 L
load: 2 A) A6 7
(16 A/Unit) c7 B7 L
A7
B8 NC
NC A8
B9 NC

128
Specifications Appendix B

Life Expectancy of Contact Output Unit

The C200H-OC221/222/223/224/225 Contact Output Unit uses OMRON’s G6B-1174P-FD-US Relay. The life of
the G6B-1174P-FD-US Relay varies with the contact current and ambient temperature. Refer to the following
graphs to calculate this value.

Contact Current vs. Life Expectancy Ambient Temperature vs. Life

Conditions Expectancy
Switching frequency: 1,800 times/hour max. Conditions
Ambient temperature: 23°C Switching frequency: 1,800 times/hour max.

OMRON’s H3BA 30 VDC, L/R = 40 ms

250 VAC, cosφ = 0.4
Timer (200 VAC) (electromagnetic valve)
30 VDC, L/R = 7 ms
OMRON’s MA415A (HK, MM, and MY
Contactor (200 VAC) Hinge-type Relay)
Life expectancy (x 10 4 operations)

Life expectancy (x 10 4 operations)

250 VAC, cosφ = 1 A at 250 VAC,
130 VDC, L/R = 0 2 A at 250 VAC, resistive load resistive load
2 A at 30 VDC, resistive load 1 A at 30 VDC,
resistive load

OMRON’s 1 A at 250 VAC, inductive load

MY4 Relay (cosφ = 0.4)
(200 VAC) 1 A at 30 VDC, inductive load
(L/R = 7 ms)
Electromagnetic
valve (250 VAC,
cosφ = 0.08 to
0.1) 2 A at 250 VAC, inductive
load (cosφ = 0.4)
2 A at 30 VDC, inductive
load (L/R = 7 ms)

Contact current (normal current) (A) Ambient temperature (°C)

Note 1. If the Contact Output Unit is panel-mounted, the temperature inside the panel represents the ambient
temperature.
2. The life of the Relay at an ambient temperature of 55°C is one-fifth the life of the Relay at room tempera-
ture (0° to 40°C).
Inductive Load
The life of the Relay varies with the load inductance. If any inductive load is connected to the Contact Output Unit,
use an arc killer with the Contact Output Unit using an inductive load.
Be sure to connect a diode in parallel with every DC inductive load that is connected to the Contact Output Unit.
Contact Protection Circuit
Arc killers are used with the Contact Output Unit in order to prolong the life of each Relay mounted to the Contact
Output Unit, prevent noise, and reduce the generation of carbide and nitrate deposits.
Note Arc killers used with the Contact Output Unit can delay the resetting time required by each Relay mounted to
the Contact Output Unit.

129
Specifications Appendix B

Arc killer circuit examples are listed in the following table.

Circuit Current Characteristic Required element
AC DC
CR method Yes Yes If the load is a relay or solenoid, there The capacitance of the capacitor must
is a time lag between the moment the be 1 to 0.5 µF per contact current of 1
circuit is opened and the moment the A and resistance of the resistor must
Inductive load is reset. be 0.5 to 1 Ω per contact voltage of 1
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V, V. These values, however, vary with
load

Power insert the arc killer in parallel with the the load and the characteristics of the
supply load. If the supply voltage is 100 to relay. Decide these values from
200 V, insert the arc killer between the experiments, and take into
contacts. consideration that the capacitance
suppresses spark discharge when the
contacts are separated and the
resistance limits the current that flows
into the load when the circuit is closed
again.
The dielectric strength of the capacitor
must be 200 to 300 V. If the circuit is
an AC circuit, use a capacitor with no
polarity.
Diode method No Yes The diode connected in parallel with The reversed dielectric strength value
the load changes energy accumulated of the diode must be at least 10 times
by the coil into a current, which then as large as the circuit voltage value.
Inductive

flows into the coil so that the current The forward current of the diode must
will be converted into Joule heat by be the same as or larger than the load
load

Power the resistance of the inductive load. current.

supply
This time lag, between the moment The reversed dielectric strength value
the circuit is opened and the moment of the diode may be two to three times
the load is reset, caused by this larger than the supply voltage if the
method is longer than that caused by arc killer is applied to electronic
the CR method. circuits with low circuit voltages.
Varistor method Yes Yes The varistor method prevents the ---
imposition of high voltage between the
contacts by using the constant voltage
characteristic of the varistor. There is
Inductive

time lag between the moment the

load

Power circuit is opened and the moment the

supply load is reset.
If the supply voltage is 24 or 48 V,
insert the varistor in parallel with the
load. If the supply voltage is 100 to
200 V, insert the varistor between the
contacts.
Note Do not connect a capacitor as an arc killer in parallel with an inductive load as shown in the following dia-
gram. This arc killer is very effective for preventing spark discharge at the moment when the circuit is
opened. However when the contacts are closed, the contacts may be welded due to the current charged in
the capacitor.
DC inductive loads can be more difficult to switch than resistive loads. If appropriate arc killers are used,
however, DC inductive loads will be as easy to switch as resistive loads.
Inductive
load

Power
supply

130
Specifications Appendix B

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD211

Max. Switching Capacity 0.3 A 24 VDC +10%/–15% (2 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 160 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply 25 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L

+V
Output indicator
OUT
L

Internal 24 VDC
Circuit Fuse COM

Fuse: GGS (Nagasawa)

5 A 125 V 5.2-dia  20

Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.

2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections

B0 0 L
1
L A0 2
3 B1 L
L A1 4
5 B2 L
L A2 6
7 B3 L
24 VDC L A3 8
(0.3 A max., 2 A/Unit) 9 B4 L
A4
L
11 B5 10 L
L A5
B6 NC
NC A6
B7 NC
NC A7
COM (OV) B8 NC
A8 + 24 VDC
B9

Note Be sure to supply power to B9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.

131
Specifications Appendix B

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD212

Max. Switching Capacity 0.3 A 24 VDC +10%/–15% (4.8 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 8 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply 35 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight 350 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L

+V
Output indicator
OUT
L
Internal 24 VDC
Circuit Fuse COM

Fuse: UL-TSC-8A-N1 (Nagasawa)

8 A 125 V 5.2-dia  20

Note 1. No blown fuse detector circuit is provided.

2. Check the fuse when there is no output.
Terminal Connections

B0 0 L
1
L A0 2
3 B1 L
L A1 4
5 B2 L
L A2 6
7 B3 L
24 VDC L A3 8
(0.3 A max ) 9 B4 L
A4
L
11 B5 10 L
A5
L
13 B6 12 L
L A6
15 B7 14 L
L A7
B8 NC
A8 + 24 VDC
COM (OV) B9

Note 1. Be sure to supply power to B9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.
2. This Unit must be mounted to a C200H-BCjj1-V1/V2 Backplane.

132
Specifications Appendix B

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD213

Max. Switching Capacity 2.1 A 24 VDC +10%/–15% (5.2 A/Unit) NPN output
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 8 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply 30 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L

+V

Output indicator
OUT
L

Internal 24 VDC
Circuit Fuse COM

Fuse blowout
detection circuit
Fuse: UL-TSC-8A-N1 (Nagasawa)
8 A 125 V 5.2-dia  20
F indicator

Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.
Terminal Connections
0
L A0
1
L A1
2
L A2
3
L A3
24 VDC
4
(2.1 A max., 5.2 A/Unit) L A4
5
L A5
6
L A6
7
L A7
COM (OV) A8
24 VDC A9

Note Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.

133
Specifications Appendix B

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD214

(Load Short-circuit Protection Provided)
Max. Switching Capacity 24 VDC +10%/–15% 0.8 A (2.4 A/Unit) surge current
2 A (source type) PNP output
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating Short-circuit protection Overcurrent protection
Thermal protection
Power for External Supply 150 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L

Output indicator
+V

Source
Driver OUT
Internal L
Circuit Reset +
button 24 VDC
COM

Alarm Output
indicator

Terminal Connections
0
L A0
1
L A1
2
L A2
3
L A3
4
24 VDC L A4
(0.8 A max., 2.4 A/Unit) 5
L A5
6
L A6
7
L A7
COM (OV) A8
24 VDC A9

Note Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.

134
Specifications Appendix B

C200H-OD214 Short-Circuit Protection

The C200H-OD214 Output Unit is equipped with two types of short-circuit protection: overcurrent protection and
thermal protection. Any short-circuit must be eliminated immediately in order to avoid damage to the Unit.
Overcurrent Protection
When the output current reaches 2 A, the alarm output turns ON, and the alarm indicator lights. Make sure the
surge current of the load does not exceed 2 A, or the alarm may be activated.
Thermal Protection
When the junction temperature of the output transistor reaches its upper limit, the output turns OFF, the alarm
output turns ON, and the alarm indicator blinks. But the output transistor is provided with a heat sink. So in some
cases, when the output is short-circuited the thermal protection may not activate because the extra heat is dissi-
pated by the heat sink. However, the alarm indicator will still light and the alarm output will still turn ON.
How It Works
When the short-circuit protection activates, the output displays the characteristic shown below.

Output Overcurrent
Voltage limit alarm
output point

0 Output current:
2 A (minimum value)

Each pair of outputs share one alarm indicator and one alarm output bit as shown below (bits 12 through 15 cannot
be used as IR bits)
Output No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Alarm indicator No. 0 2 4 6
Alarm Output Point No. 08 09 10 11
Both the alarm indicator and alarm output bit for the short-circuited output turn ON even if only one of the outputs is
short-circuited. Both outputs should be disconnected until the short-circuit can be traced.
Clearing the Alarm
When the short-circuit has been eliminated, reset the Unit by pressing the reset button. The alarm indicator will go
out, the alarm output will turn OFF, and the output will be reset.
Output indicator

Alarm indicator

Reset button (use a screwdriver

or other similar object to press it).

Programming Example
If there is a short-circuit in an output, we want the program to turn that output OFF. Assume that the Unit is mounted
at word 000. A program to turn OFF output bits 00 and 01 is shown below.
A 00008
00000

B 00008
00001

Since alarm output bit 08 covers both output bits 00 and 01, both these outputs are forced OFF as soon as output
bit 08 turns ON (bits A and B can be any other bits required in the program).

135
Specifications Appendix B

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD216

Max. Switching Capacity 0.3 A 5 to 24 VDC
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 1.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 2 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common) positive common (source
type)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Fuse Rating None
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT L
Output indicator

OUT
L

Internal 5 to 24 VDC
Circuit

COM

Terminal Connections
0
L A0
1
L A1
2
L A2
3
L A3
5 to 24 VDC 4
L A4
5
L A5
6
L A6
7
L A7
COM A8
NC A9

136
Specifications Appendix B

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD217

Max. Switching Capacity 0.3 A 5 to 24 VDC
Min. Switching Capacity 10 mA 5 VDC
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.5 V max.
ON Response Time 1.5 ms max.
OFF Response Time 2 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (12 points/common) positive common (source
type)
Internal Current Consumption 10 mA 5 VDC max. 75 mA 26 VDC (8 points ON
simultaneously.)
Fuse Rating None
Power for External Supply N/A
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration

OUT
L
Output indicator

OUT
L
Internal 5 to
Circuit 24 VDC

COM

Terminal Connections

B0 0
1 L
L A0
B1 2
3 L
L A1
B2 4
5 L
L A2
5 to 24 VDC B3 6
7 L
L A3
B4 8
9 L
L A4
11 B5 10 L
L A5
B6 NC
NC A6
B7 NC
NC A7
B8 NC
COM A8
B9 NC

137
Specifications Appendix B

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD411

Max. Switching Capacity 12 to 48 VDC 1 A (3 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 1.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 140 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 5 A 125 V (5.2-dia.x20)
Power for External Supply 30 mA 12 to 48 VDC min.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions A-shape

Circuit Configuration
OUT
L

V
Output indicator
OUT
L

Internal
Circuit Fuse COM
12 to
48 VDC
Fuse blowout
detection circuit Fuse: GSS (Nagasawa)
5 A 125 V 5.2-dia  20

F indicator

Note When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and bit 08 turns ON. Bits 08 through 15 cannot be used as IR bits.

Terminal Connections
0
L A0
1
L A1
2
L A2
3
L A3
12 to 48 VDC 4
(1 A max., 3 A/Unit)
L A4
5
L A5
6
L A6
7
L A7
COM (OV) A8
12 to 48 VDC A9

Note Be sure to supply power to A9; otherwise current will leak through the load while the output is OFF.

138
Specifications Appendix B

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD21A

(Load Circuit Protection Provided)
Max. Switching Capacity 24 VDC +10%/–15%, 1.0 A (4 A/Unit) surge current
1.6 A (sourcing type) PNP output
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.8 V max.
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (16 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 160 mA 5 VDC max.
Power for External Supply 35 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
Weight 400 g max.
Alarm Output (see note 1) No. of outputs: 1 (2 kΩ internal resistor)
Connectable Units: Only the following DC Input
Units and alarm output LED indicators can be
connected:
C200H-ID001, ID211, ID212, IM211 (DC), IM212
(DC), ID215, ID501, MD115, MD215, MD501
Reset Input Used when alarm output turns ON. Value will
depend on the external power supply. (See note 2.)
Load Short-circuit Protection Detection current: 1.2 A min.
(1.6 A typical)
Dimensions B-shape

Circuit Configuration
Short-circuit

Output LED
protection

indicator
circuit
Internal Circuit

to

0V
2 kΩ

Note 1. When the short-circuit/overload protection is activated, all 16 outputs are switched OFF and the ALARM
output becomes active (low level). It is possible to determine the cause of the alarm by connecting either
a DC Input Unit to the alarm output or an alarm output LED indicator.
2. When alarm output turns ON, remove the cause of the overload, turn OFF the external power supply (for
about 1 s), and confirm that the error has been cleared before turning ON power again and restoring
output.
As indicated in the following terminal connections diagram, it is recommended that a relay or switch
used solely to turn ON and OFF the Unit’s external power supply be connected immediately in front of B9
(+V). In this case, use a relay or switch with a contact capacity that is greater than the current consump-
tion of the external power supply for the Unit (35mA) + the load current.

139
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections

+24 VDC

24 VDC

C200HS-INT01 Interrupt Input Unit

The Interrupt Input Unit temporarily interrupts the main program by means of in-
puts, and executes interrupt subroutines. It must be mounted to a C200HS CPU
Rack, and there can be only one Interrupt Input Unit on the Rack. (It is possible to
mount it to an Expansion I/O Rack, but in that case it will be treated as a Standard
Input Unit and will have no interrupt functions.) Use a C200H-BCjj1-V2 Back-
plane. The word number of the slot position to which the Unit is mounted is allo-
cated as eight input points.

Operation display area:

Displays the ON/OFF status of interrupts.

Terminal block:
Consists of removable components.

Rated Input Voltage 12 to 24 VDC +10%/–15%

Input Impedance 2 KΩ
Input Current 10 mA typical (24 VDC)
ON Voltage 10.2 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.5 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 20 mA, 5 VDC max.
Weight 200 g max.

140
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration
IN

IN 2 kW

0.01 1.8 Internal

mF kW Circuit
COM

12 to 24 VDC

Input indicator

Either plus or minus can be used for the input power supply.

Terminal Connections
0
A0
1
A1
2
A2
3
A3
12 to 24 VDC 4
A4
5
A5
6
A6
7
A7
COM
A8
NC A9

Group-2 High-density I/O Units

In the following diagrams, “m” is the first word allocated to the Unit in PC memory.

DC Input Unit C200H-ID111 (64 Points)

Rated Input Voltage 12 VDC +10%/–15%
Operating Input Voltage 10.2 to 13.2 VDC
Input Impedance 2.7 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 12 VDC)
ON Voltage 8.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 120 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions D-shape

141
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration

COM
1000 pF
IN00 Internal
Circuit
A IN07 820 W
COM
IN08 2.7 kW
CN1
CN1 IN15 SW
COM Indicator
IN00 switch
CN2 circuit
IN07
B
COM
IN08 Input indicator
IN15
COM
IN00 1000 pF
Internal
IN07 Circuit
A
COM 820 W
IN08
2.7 kW
IN15
CN2
COM
IN00

IN07
B
COM
IN08

IN15

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
I/O word “m+1” I/O word “m” I/O word “m+2” I/O word “m+3”
B A A B
0 0
NC 20 20 NC 1 1
1 1
NC 19 19 NC 2 2
COM COM 2 2
18 18 3 3
15 15 12 VDC 3 3
17 17 4 4 12 VDC
14 14 4 4
16 16 5 5
12 VDC 13 13 12 VDC + 5 5 +
15 15 6 6
+ 12 12 + 6 6
14 14 7 7
11 11 7 7
13 13 8 8
10 10 COM COM
12 12 9 9
9 9 8 8
11 11 10 10
8 8 9 9
10 10 11 11
COM COM 10 10
9 9 12 12
7 7 12 VDC 11 11
8 8 13 13 12 VDC
6 6 12 12
7 7 14 14
12 VDC 5 5 12 VDC + 13 13 +
6 6 15 15
+ 4 4 + 14 14
5 5 16 16
3 3 15 15
4 4 17 17
2 2 COM COM
3 3 18 18
1 2 2 1 NC 19 19 NC
0 1 1 0 NC 20 20 NC

Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number).

142
 Specifications Appendix B

2. The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals in
each connector. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in
each connector are connected internally.

DC Input Unit C200H-ID216 (32 Points)

Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 5.6 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (32 points/common)
All 32 points cannot be turned ON simultaneously
at high temperatures. Refer to the following graph.
Internal Current Consumption 100 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 180 g max.
Dimensions C-shape

Circuit Configuration and Simultaneously Usable Points

32 Input Voltage: 26.4 VDC

COM 30
1000 pF
IN00
25
A IN07 680 W
Simultaneously Usable Points

COM
IN08 5.6 kW 20
IN15 Input indicator
Internal
Circuit 15
COM
1000 pF
IN00 10

B IN07 680 W
COM 5
IN08 5.6 kW
Input indicator
IN15 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 60
Ambient Temperature (°C)

143
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
I/O word “m” I/O word “m+1”
A B
0 0
1 1
1 1
2 2
2 2
3 3
3 3
24 VDC 4 4 24 VDC
4 4
5 5
+ 5 5 +
6 6
6 6
7 7
7 7
8 8
COM COM
9 9
8 8
10 10
9 9
11 11
10 10
12 12
11 11
24 VDC 13 13 24 VDC
12 12
14 14
+ 13 13 +
15 15
14 14
16 16
15 15
17 17
COM COM
18 18
NC 19 19 NC

NC 20 20 NC

Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number).
2. The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals.
Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals are connected
internally.

DC Input Unit C200H-ID217 (64 Points)

Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 5.6 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (32 points/common)
All 64 points cannot be turned ON simultaneously
at high temperatures. Refer to the following graph.
Internal Current Consumption 120 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions D-shape

144
 Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration and Simultaneously Usable Points

COM
1000 pF
IN00 Internal
Circuit Input Voltage:
A IN07 680 W 24.0 VDC
COM
IN08 64
5.6 kW
60 Input Voltage:
CN1 26.4 VDC
CN1 IN15 SW
COM Indicator
IN00 50

Simultaneously Usable Points

switch
CN2 circuit
IN07
B
COM 40
IN08 Input indicator
IN15 30
COM
IN00 1000 pF
Internal
IN07 Circuit 20
A
COM 680 W
IN08
5.6 kW 10
IN15
CN2
COM
IN00 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 55 60
IN07 Ambient Temperature (°C)
B
COM
IN08

IN15

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
I/O word “m+1” I/O word “m” I/O word “m+2” I/O word “m+3”
B A A B
0 0
NC 20 20 NC 1 1
1 1
NC 19 19 NC 2 2
COM COM 2 2
18 18 3 3
15 15 24 VDC 3 3
17 17 4 4 24 VDC
14 14 4 4
16 16 5 5
24 VDC 13 13 24 VDC + 5 5 +
15 15 6 6
+ 12 12 + 6 6
14 14 7 7
11 11 7 7
13 13 8 8
10 10 COM COM
12 12 9 9
9 9 8 8
11 11 10 10
8 8 9 9
10 10 11 11
COM COM 10 10
9 9 12 12
7 7 24 VDC 11 11
8 8 13 13 24 VDC
6 6 12 12
7 7 14 14
24 VDC 5 5 24 VDC + 13 13 +
6 6 15 15
+ 4 4 + 14 14
5 5 16 16
3 3 15 15
4 4 17 17
2 2 COM COM
3 3 18 18
1 2 2 1 NC 19 19 NC
0 1 1 0 NC 20 20 NC

Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number).

145
Specifications Appendix B

2. The power can be supplied in either polarity, but the same polarity must be used for all COM terminals in
each connector. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in
each connector are connected internally.

DC Input Unit C200H-ID218

Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Input Impedance 3.9 kΩ
Input Current 6 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage/ON Current 15.4 VDC min./3.5 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current 5.0 VDC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time 1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits 32 (32 points/common)
Note The number of points that can be ON simulta-
neously is limited according to the ambient
temperature. Refer to the following diagram
for details.
Internal Current Consumption 100 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 180 g max.

Circuit Configuration

Ambient Temperature for Simultaneously ON Points

0.01 µF
Input voltage: 24.0 VDC
to
Simultaneously ON points

470 Ω
Input voltage: 26.4 VDC
Internal circuit

3.9 kΩ
to

Input LED indicator

0.01 µF

to
470 Ω
3.9 kΩ
to
Input LED indicator
Ambient temperature

146
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
m words m + 1 words
(m = 030 + 2 × I/O number)

24 VDC 24 VDC

24 VDC 24 VDC

Note 1. The polarity of the input power supply can be either positive or negative. The polarity of all commons,
however, must be the same.
2. COM terminals must all be wired even though they are connected internally.

DC Input Unit C200H-ID219

Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC +10%/–15%
Input Impedance 3.9 kΩ
Input Current 6 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage/ON Current 15.4 VDC min./3.5 mA min.
OFF Voltage/OFF Current 5.0 VDC max./1 mA max.
ON Response Time 1.0 ms max.
OFF Response Time 1.0 ms max.
No. of Circuits 64 (32 points/common)
Note The number of points that can be ON simulta-
neously is limited according to the ambient
temperature. Refer to the following diagram
for details.
Internal Current Consumption 120 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 250 g max.

147
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration

Internal circuit
0.01 µF
Input LED indicator
to Ambient Temperature for Simultaneously ON Points
470 Ω
3.9 kΩ
Input voltage: 20.4 VDC
to

Input voltage: 24.0 VDC

Simultaneously ON points
to

to Input voltage: 26.4 VDC

Input LED indicator

Internal circuit
0.01 µF
to

470 Ω
to 3.9 kΩ

to

to
Ambient temperature

Terminal Connections
(m = 030 + 2 × I/O number)
(m + 1) words (m + 1) words (m + 2) words (m + 3) words

24 VDC 24 VDC

24 VDC 24 VDC

24 VDC 24 VDC

24 VDC 24 VDC

Note 1. The polarity of the input power supply can be either positive or negative. The polarity of all commons for
CN1 and CN2, however, must be the same.
2. COM terminals for CN1 and CN2 must all be wired even though they are connected internally.

148
Specifications Appendix B

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD218 (32 Points)

Max. Switching Capacity 16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC (see below)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.8 V max.
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.4 ms max.
No. of Circuits 1 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuse Rating 3.5 A (The fuse is not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 110 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(3.4 mA × number of ON pts)
Weight 180 g max.
Dimensions C-shape

Circuit Configuration and Maximum Switching Capacity

4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00 100

Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)

OUT07

COM
Internal Output indicator A
Circuit 4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08 50

OUT15

COM
4.5 to 16
Output indicator
26.4 VDC
Fuse blowout detection circuit OUT00 0
Fuse
(3 A)
OUT07 0 4.5 10 20.4 26.4
F indicator COM Power Supply Voltage (V)
4.5 to B
26.4 VDC
OUT08

OUT15
COM

149
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections

I/O word “m” I/O word “m+1”

A B
0 0
L 1 1 L
1 1
L 2 2 L
2 2
L 3 3 L
3 3
L 4 4 L 4.5 to
+ 4 4 + 26.4 VDC
L 5 5 L
5 5
L 6 6 L
6 6
L 7 7 L
7 7
L 8 8 L
COM COM
9 9
10 10
8 8
L 11 11 L
9 9
L 12 12 L
10 10
L 13 13 L
11 11
L 14 14 L
+ 12 12 +
L 15 15 L
13 13
L 16 16 L
14 14
L 17 17 L
15 15
L 18 18 L
COM COM
19 19
20 20

Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number).
2. When the fuse blows, the F indicator lights and the error flag in AR 02 corresponding to the I/O number is
turned ON. I/O numbers 0 to 9 correspond to AR 0205 to AR 0214.
3. The interruption of power from the external power supply is treated the same as a fuse blowout.
4. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals are connected
internally.

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD219 (64 Points)

Max. Switching Capacity 16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC (see below)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.8 V max.
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.4 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 270 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses Two 3.5 A fuses (1 fuse/common)
The fuses are not user-replacable.
Power for External Supply 220 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(3.4 mA × number of ON pts)
Weight 250 g max.
Dimensions D-shape

150
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration

4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00

OUT07
Internal
Circuit COM
CN1
Fuse 4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08

SW CN1 OUT15
Indicator COM
switch/ Output indicator
fuse CN2
blowout F indicator
detection
circuit
4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT00

OUT07
Internal
Circuit COM
CN2
Fuse 4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08

OUT15
COM

Maximum Switching Capacity

6.4
6.0
Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)

Max. Switching Capacity (A/unit)

100
5.0

4.0

50 3.0

2.0

16 1.0

0 0
0 4.5 10 20.4 26.4 0 10 20 30 40 505560
Power Supply Voltage (V) Ambient Temperature (°C)

151
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections
CN1 CN2
I/O word “m+1” I/O word “m” I/O word “m+2” I/O word “m+3”
B A A B
0 0
20 20 L 1 1 L
COM COM 1 1
19 19 L 2 2 L
15 15 2 2
L 18 18 L L 3 3 L
14 14 3 3
L 17 17 L L 4 4 L 4.5 to
13 13 + 4 4 + 26.4 VDC
L 16 16 L L 5 5 L
12 12 5 5
+ L 15 15 L + L 6 6 L
11 11 6 6
L 14 14 L L 7 7 L
10 10 7 7
L 13 13 L L 8 8 L
9 9 COM COM
L 12 12 L 9 9
8 8
L 11 11 L 10 10
8 8
10 10 L 11 11 L
COM COM 9 9
9 9 L 12 12 L
7 7 10 10
L 8 8 L L 13 13 L
6 6 11 11
L 7 7 L L 14 14 L
5 5 + 12 12 +
L 6 6 L L 15 15 L
4 4 13 13
+ L 5 5 L + L 16 16 L
3 3 14 14
L 4 4 L L 17 17 L
2 2 15 15
L 3 3 L L 18 18 L
1 1 COM COM
L 2 2 L 19 19
0 0
L 1 1 L 20 20

Note 1. I/O word “m” is determined by the I/O number setting (m = IR 030 + 2 × I/O number).
2. When either fuse blows, the F indicator lights and the error flag in AR 02 corresponding to the I/O number
is turned ON. I/O numbers 0 to 9 correspond to AR 0205 to AR 0214.
3. The interruption of power from the external power supply is treated the same as a fuse blowout.
4. Connect power supply wiring to every COM terminal, even though the COM terminals in each connector
are connected internally.

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD21B (32 Points)

(Load Short-circuit Protection Provided)
Max. Switching Current 0.5 A 24 VDC +10%/–15% (5 A/Unit)
Min. Switching Current None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.8 V max.
ON Response Time 0.1 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 32 (32 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses One 7 A fuse (1 fuse/common)
The fuses are not user-replacable.
Power for External Supply 160 mA 24 VDC +10%/–15% min.
(5 mA × number of ON pts)
Weight 180 g max.
Alarm Indicator Lamp F lights (unless fuse is broken).
Load Short-circuit Prevention Detection current: 0.7 to 2.5 A
(see note 1) Automatic restart after error clearance.
Dimensions C-shape

152
Specifications Appendix B

Note When the short-circuit/overload protection is activated for a contact point, the output for that point is turned
OFF. At the same time, lamp “F” lights up, and the alarm from AR0205 to AR0214 corresponding to the I/O
number turns ON. After the cause of the error has been removed, the alarm will be cleared automatically
when the internal temperature of the element drops.

Circuit Configuration

Short-circuit
protection
circuit
to

Output LED 0V

Internal circuit
indicator

to

Alarm
LED 0V
indi-
cator

Short-circuit
protection
circuit
to
0V
Output LED
indicator
to

0V

Terminal Connections
I/O word “m” I/O word “m+1”

24 VDC 24 VDC

24 VDC 24 VDC

153
Specifications Appendix B

High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)

TTL Input Unit C200H-ID501 (32 Points)
Rated Input Voltage 5 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 4.5 to 5.5 VDC
Input Impedance 1.1 kW
Input Current 3.5 mA (at 5 VDC)
ON Voltage 3.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 1.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable; at 24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable; at 24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 4 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs 8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
Internal Current Consumption 130 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

Circuit Configuration

COM0

IN00 2.4 kW
CN1 IN07
COM1
IN08 1.1 kW

IN15
Internal
Circuit
COM2

IN00 2.4 kW
CN2 IN07
COM3
IN08 1.1 kW

IN15

154
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections

CN1 CN2
I/O word “n” I/O word “n+1”
B A A B
NC 12 12 NC
0 8
1 1
NC 11 11 NC
1 9
2 2
NC 10 10 NC
2 10
3 3
COM1
9 9 COM0
5 VDC 3 11 5 VDC
4 4
15 8 8 7 + 4 12 +
5 5
14 7 7 6 + 5 13 +
6 6
5 VDC 13 6 6 5 5 VDC 6 14
7 7
+ 12 4 +
5 5 7 15
8 8
+ 11 4 4 3 + COM2 COM3
9 9
10 3 3 2
NC 10 10 NC
9 2 2 1
NC 11 11 NC
8 1 1 0
NC 12 12 NC

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.

DC Input Unit C200H-ID215 (32 Points)

Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC
Operating Input Voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 5.6 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 14.4 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable; at 24 VDC, 25°C)
OFF Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable; at 24 VDC, 25°C)
No. of Circuits 4 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs 8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)
Internal Current Consumption 130 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

155
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration

COM0
1000 pF
IN00

CN1 IN07 620 W

COM1
IN08 5.6 kW

IN15
Internal
Circuit
COM2
1000 pF
IN00

CN2 IN07 620 W

COM3
IN08 5.6 kW

IN15

Terminal Connections

CN1 CN2
I/O word “n” I/O word “n+1”
B A A B
NC 12 12 NC
0 8
1 1
NC 11 11 NC
1 9
2 2
NC 10 10 NC
2 10
3 3
COM1
9 9 COM0
24 VDC 3 11 24 VDC
4 4
15 8 8 7 + 4 12 +
5 5
14 7 7 6 + 5 13 +
6 6
24 VDC 13 6 6 5 24 VDC 6 14
7 7
+ 12 4 +
5 5 7 15
8 8
+ 11 4 4 3 + COM2 COM3
9 9
10 3 3 2
NC 10 10 NC
9 2 2 1
NC 11 11 NC
8 1 1 0
NC 12 12 NC

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
3. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to the
graphs on page 172 for details.

156
Specifications Appendix B

TTL Output Unit C200H-OD501 (Used as a 32-point Output Unit)

Max. Switching Capacity 5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 1.12 A/Unit;
output resistance 4.7 kW)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 4 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses 4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 39 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

Circuit Configuration

5 VDC

4.7 kW

OUT00

OUT07
CN1
COM0
Fuse
5 VDC
OUT08

OUT15
Internal COM1
Circuit 5 VDC

4.7 kW

OUT00

OUT07
CN2
COM2
Fuse
5 VDC
OUT08

OUT15
COM3

157
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections

CN1 CN2
I/O word “n” I/O word “n+1”
A B
B A 0 8
12 12 L 1 1 L
NC NC
1 9
11 11 L 2 2 L
NC NC
+5 VDC +5 VDC 2 10
10 10 L 3 3 L

5 VDC 3 11
COM1 COM0 L 4 4 L 5 VDC
9 9
15 7 + L
4
5 5
12
L
+
L 8 8 L
5 13
14 7 7 6 5 VDC L 6 6 L
L L
6 14
5 VDC 13 6 6 5 L 7 7 L
L L
7 15
12 5 5 4 L 8 8 L
+ L L + COM2 COM3
11 4 4 3 9 9
L L +5 VDC +5 VDC
10 3 3 2 10 10
L L
9 2 2 1 NC 11 11 NC
L L
8 1 1 0 NC 12 12 NC
L L

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 32 static output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. The outputs are negative logic outputs; when there is an output, the terminal has an “L” voltage level.
Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.

TTL Output Unit C200H-OD501 (Used as 128-point Dynamic Output Unit)

Max. Switching Capacity 5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 1.12 A/Unit;
output resistance 4.7 kW)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses 4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 39 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

158
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration

5 VDC

4.7 kW

DATA00

DATA07

COM0
Fuse CN1
5 VDC

4.7 kW

Internal STB00
Circuit
STB07

COM1
Fuse 5 VDC
DATA08

DATA15
COM2
CN2
5 VDC
STB08

STB15
COM3

Terminal Connections

CN1
B A
NC 12 12 NC

NC 11 11 NC
CN2
+V1 10 10 +V0 + 5 VDC
COM1 COM0
A B
9 9 DATA8 STB8
STB7 DATA7 Output device Strobe 1 1
8 8 input DATA9 STB9
(such as a nu-
STB6 DATA6 meric display) 2 2
7 7 DATA10 STB10
STB5 DATA5 3 3
6 6 DATA11 STB11
STB4 DATA4 Data 4 4
5 5 Data input DATA12 STB12
STB3 DATA3 input 5 5
4 4 DATA13 STB13
STB2 DATA2 6 6
3 3 DATA14 STB14
Output device 7 7
STB1 2 2 DATA1 Strobe
(such as a nu-
input
meric display)
DATA15 STB15
STB0 DATA0 8 8
1 1 COM2 COM3
+ 9 9
+V2 +V3
10 10
5 VDC
NC 11 11 NC

NC 12 12 NC

Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Set pin 5 of the Unit’s DIP switch ON for positive logic outputs, or OFF for negative logic outputs. When
set for negative logic outputs, the terminal has an “L” voltage level when there is an output. When set for
positive logic outputs, the terminal has an “H” voltage level when there is an output.
4. The strobe signal has negative logic regardless of the setting of pin 5.

159
Specifications Appendix B

5. Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD215 (Used as 32-point Output Unit)

Max. Switching Capacity 16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC (see page
172)
800 mA/common, 3.2 A/Unit
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.7 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.6 ms max.
No. of Circuits 4 (8 points/common)
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses 4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 90 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

Circuit Configuration

4.5 to
26.4 VDC

OUT00

OUT07
CN1
COM0
Fuse 4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08

OUT15
Internal COM1
Circuit 4.5 to
26.4 VDC

OUT00

OUT07
CN2
COM2
Fuse 4.5 to
26.4 VDC
OUT08

OUT15
COM3

160
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections

CN1 CN2
I/O word “n” I/O word “n+1”
A B
B A 0 8
12 12 L 1 1 L
NC NC
1 9
11 11 L 2 2 L
NC NC
+5 to 24 VDC +5 to 24 VDC 2 10
10 10 L 3 3 L

5 to 24 3 11
COM1 COM0 L 4 4 L 5 to 24
9 9 VDC
15 7 + L
4
5 5
12
L
+VDC
L 8 8 L
5 13
14 7 7 6 5 to 24 L 6 6 L
L L
VDC 6 14
5 to 24 13 6 6 5 L 7 7 L
L L
VDC 7 15
12 5 5 4 L 8 8 L
+ L L + COM2 COM3
11 4 4 3 9 9
L L +5 to 24 VDC +5 to 24 VDC
10 3 3 2 10 10
L L
9 2 2 1 NC 11 11 NC
L L
8 1 1 0 NC 12 12 NC
L L

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 32 static output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.

Transistor Output Unit C200H-OD215

(Used as 128-point Dynamic Output Unit)
Max. Switching Capacity 16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC (see page
172)
800 mA/common, 3.2 A/Unit
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.7 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.6 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)
Internal Current Consumption 220 mA 5 VDC max.
Fuses 4 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 90 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

161
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration

4.5 to
26.4 VDC

DATA00

DATA07

COM0
Fuse CN1
4.5 to
26.4 VDC

Internal STB00
Circuit
STB07

COM1
Fuse 4.5 to
26.4 VDC
DATA08

DATA15
COM2
4.5 to CN2
26.4 VDC
STB08

STB15
COM3

Terminal Connections

CN1
B A
NC 12 12 NC

NC 11 11 NC
CN2
5 to 24 VDC
+V1 10 10 +V0 +
COM1 COM0
B A
9 9 DATA8 STB8
STB7 DATA7 Output device Strobe 1 1
8 8 input DATA9 STB9
(such as a nu-
STB6 DATA6 meric display) 2 2
7 7 DATA10 STB10
STB5 DATA5 3 3
6 6 DATA11 STB11
STB4 DATA4 Data 4 4
5 5 Data input DATA12 STB12
STB3 DATA3 input 5 5
4 4 DATA13 STB13
STB2 DATA2 6 6
3 3 DATA14 STB14
Output device 7 7
STB1 2 2 DATA1 Strobe
(such as a nu-
input
meric display)
DATA15 STB15
STB0 DATA0 8 8
1 1 COM2 COM3
+ 9 9
+V2 +V3
10 10
5 to 24 VDC
NC 11 11 NC

NC 12 12 NC

Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Set pin 5 of the Unit’s DIP switch ON for positive logic outputs, or OFF for negative logic outputs. When
set for negative logic outputs, the terminal has an “L” voltage level when there is an output. When set for
positive logic outputs, the terminal has an “H” voltage level when there is an output.

162
Specifications Appendix B

4. The strobe signal has negative logic regardless of the setting of pin 5.
5. When the output device (such as a numeric display) does not have a pull-up resistor, it is necessary to
add a pull-up resistor between the + terminal of the power supply and each data (0 to 15) and strobe (0 to
15) terminal.

TTL I/O Unit C200H-MD501

(Used as I/O Unit with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs)
Output Specifications Max. Switching Capacity 5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 560 mA/Unit;
(Connector 1) output resistance 4.7 kW)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (8 points/common)
Fuses 2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 20 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)

Input Specifications Rated Input Voltage 5 VDC

(Connector 2)
Operating Input Voltage 4.5 to 5.5 VDC
Input Impedance 1.1 kW
Input Current 3.5 mA (at 5 VDC)
ON Voltage 3.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 1.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
OFF Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
No. of Circuits 2 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs 8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)

General Specifications Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.

Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

Circuit Configuration

5 VDC

4.7 kW

OUT00

OUT07
CN1 (Output)
COM0
Fuse
5 VDC
Internal OUT08
Circuit
OUT15
1.1 kW COM1
IN00

IN07
2.4 kW
COM2 CN2 (Input)
IN08

IN15
COM3

163
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections

CN1 CN2
I/O word “n” I/O word “n+1”
B A A B
0 8
NC 12 12 NC 1 1
1 9
NC 11 11 NC 2 2
+5 VDC +5 VDC 2 10
10 10 3 3
COM1 COM0 5 VDC 3 11 5 VDC
9 9 4 4
15 7 + 4 12 +
L 8 8 L 5 5
14 6 5 VDC + 5 13 +
L 7 7 L 6 6
5 VDC 13 5 6 14
L 6 6 L 7 7
12 4 7 15
+ L 5 5 L + 8 8
11 3 COM2 COM3
L 4 4 L 9 9
10 3 3 2 NC 10 10 NC
L L
9 2 2 1 NC 11 11 NC
L L
8 1 1 0 NC 12 12 NC
L L

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.
4. The outputs are negative logic outputs; when there is an output, the terminal has an “L” voltage level.
Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.
5. The user is not authorized to change the fuse.

TTL I/O Unit C200H-MD501 (Used as 128-point Dynamic Input Unit)

Output Specifications Max. Switching Capacity 5 VDC 35 mA (280 mA/common, 560 mA/Unit;
(Connector 1) output resistance 4.7 kW)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.4 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.3 ms max.
Fuses 2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 20 mA 5 VDC min. (1.2 mA × no. of outputs ON)

Input Specifications Rated Input Voltage 5 VDC

(Connector 2)
Operating Input Voltage 4.5 to 5.5 VDC
Input Impedance 1.1 kW
Input Current 3.5 mA (at 5 VDC)
ON Voltage 3.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 1.0 VDC max.

General Specifications No. of Circuits 2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)

Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

164
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration

5 VDC

4.7 kW

STB00

STB07
CN1
COM0
Fuse
5 VDC
Internal STB08
Circuit
STB15
1.1 kW COM1
DATA00

DATA07
2.4 kW
COM2 CN2
DATA08

DATA15
COM3

Terminal Connections

CN1 CN2
B A A B
12 12 DATA0 DATA8
NC NC 1 1
11 11 DATA1 DATA9
NC NC 2 2
5 VDC +V1 +V0 5 VDC DATA2 DATA10
10 10 3 3
+ COM1
9 9 COM0 + DATA3 DATA11
4 4
STB15 8 STB7 Keyboard, thumb- DATA4 DATA12
8 wheel switch, etc. 5 5
STB14 7 7 STB6 DATA5 DATA13
6 6
STB13 6 6 STB5 DATA6 DATA14
7 7
STB12 5 5 STB4 DATA7 DATA15
8 8
STB11 4 4 STB3 COM2 COM3
9 9
STB10 3 3 STB2
NC 10 10 NC
STB9 2 2 STB1
NC 11 11 NC
STB8 1 1 STB0
NC 12 12 NC

Keyboard, thumb-
wheel switch, etc.

Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.

165
Specifications Appendix B

12 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD115

(Used as I/O Unit with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs)
Output Specifications Max. Switching Capacity 16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC (see page
(Connector 1) 172), 800 mA/common, 1.6 A/Unit
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.7 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.6 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (8 points/common)
Fuses 2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 45 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)

Input Specifications Rated Input Voltage 12 VDC +10%/–15%

(Connector 2)
Operating Input Voltage 10.2 to 13.2 VDC
Input Impedance 2.7 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 12 VDC)
ON Voltage 8.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 3.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
OFF Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
No. of Circuits 2 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs 8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)

General Specifications Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.

Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

Circuit Configuration

4.5 to
26.4 VDC
4.7 kW

OUT00

OUT07
CN1
COM0
Fuse 4.5 to
26.4 VDC
Internal OUT08
Circuit
OUT15
2.7 kW COM1
IN00

IN07
620 W 1000 pF
COM2 CN2
IN08

IN15
COM3

166
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections

CN1 CN2
I/O word “n” I/O word “n+1”
B A A B
0 8
NC 12 12 NC 1 1
1 9
NC 11 11 NC 2 2
+5 to 24 VDC +5 to 24 VDC 2 10
10 10 3 3
COM1 COM0 12 VDC 3 11 12 VDC
9 9 4 4
15 7 + 4 12 +
L 8 8 L 5 5
14 6 5 to 24 + 5 13 +
L 7 7 L 6 6
13 5 VDC 6 14
5 to 24 6 6 7 7
L L
VDC
12 4 7 15
+ L 5 5 L + 8 8
11 3 COM2 COM3
L 4 4 L 9 9
10 3 3 2 NC 10 10 NC
L L
9 2 2 1 NC 11 11 NC
L L
8 1 1 0 NC 12 12 NC
L L

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.

12 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD115

(Used as 128-point Dynamic Input Unit)
Output Specifications Max. Switching Capacity 50 mA 12 VDC, 400 mA/common, 0.8 A/Unit
(Connector 1)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.7 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.6 ms max.
Fuses 2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 45 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)

Input Specifications Rated Input Voltage 12 VDC

(Connector 2)
Operating Input Voltage 10.2 to 13.2 VDC
Input Impedance 2.7 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 12 VDC)
ON Voltage 8.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 3.0 VDC max.

General Specifications No. of Circuits 2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)

Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

167
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration

12 VDC

STB00

STB07
CN1
COM0
Fuse
12 VDC
Internal STB08
Circuit
STB15
2.7 kW COM1
DATA00

DATA07
620 W 1000 pF
COM2 CN2
DATA08

DATA15
COM3

Terminal Connections

CN1 CN2
B A A B
12 12 DATA0 DATA8
NC NC 1 1
11 11 DATA1 DATA9
NC NC 2 2
12 VDC +V1 +V0 12 VDC DATA2 DATA10
10 10 3 3
+ COM1
9 9 COM0 + DATA3 DATA11
4 4
STB15 8 STB7 Keyboard, thumb- DATA4 DATA12
8 wheel switch, etc. 5 5
STB14 7 7 STB6 DATA5 DATA13
6 6
STB13 6 6 STB5 DATA6 DATA14
7 7
STB12 5 5 STB4 DATA7 DATA15
8 8
STB11 4 4 STB3 COM2 COM3
9 9
STB10 3 3 STB2
NC 10 10 NC
STB9 2 2 STB1
NC 11 11 NC
STB8 1 1 STB0
NC 12 12 NC

Keyboard, thumb-
wheel switch, etc.

Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.

168
Specifications Appendix B

24 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD215

(Used as I/O Unit with 16 Inputs and 16 Outputs)
Output Specifications Max. Switching Capacity 16 mA 4.5 VDC to 100 mA 26.4 VDC (see page
(Connector 1) 172), 800 mA/common, 1.6 A/Unit
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.7 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.6 ms max.
No. of Circuits 2 (8 points/common)
Fuses 2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 45 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)

Input Specifications Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC

(Connector 2)
Operating Input Voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 5.6 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 14.4.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 5.0 VDC max.
ON Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
OFF Response Time 2.5 ms/15 ms max. (switchable)
No. of Circuits 2 (8 points/common)
High-speed Inputs 8 points (connector 2 terminals 8 to 15, when set)
Pulse width: 1 ms/4 ms min. (switchable)

General Specifications Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.

Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

Circuit Configuration

4.5 to
26.4 VDC

OUT00

OUT07
CN1
COM0
Fuse 4.5 to
26.4 VDC
Internal OUT08
Circuit
OUT15
COM1
IN00

IN07

COM2 CN2
IN08

IN15
COM3

169
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Connections

CN1 CN2
I/O word “n” I/O word “n+1”
B A A B
0 8
NC 12 12 NC 1 1
1 9
NC 11 11 NC 2 2
+5 to 24 VDC +5 to 24 VDC 2 10
10 10 3 3
COM1 COM0 24 VDC 3 11 24 VDC
9 9 4 4
15 7 + 4 12 +
L 8 8 L 5 5
14 6 5 to 24 + 5 13 +
L 7 7 L 6 6
13 5 VDC 6 14
5 to 24 6 6 7 7
L L
VDC
12 4 7 15
+ L 5 5 L + 8 8
11 3 COM2 COM3
L 4 4 L 9 9
10 3 3 2 NC 10 10 NC
L L
9 2 2 1 NC 11 11 NC
L L
8 1 1 0 NC 12 12 NC
L L

Note 1. I/O word “n” is determined by the unit number setting (n = IR 100 + 10 × unit number).
2. The Unit will have 16 static output and16 static input points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is OFF.
3. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to the
graph on page 172 for details.
4. When pin 2 of the Unit’s DIP switch is ON, input points 08 to 15 in connector 2 are high-speed inputs.

24 VDC Input/Transistor Output Unit C200H-MD215

(Used as 128-point Dynamic Input Unit)
Output Specifications Max. Switching Capacity 100 mA 24 VDC, 800 mA/common, 1.6 A/Unit
(Connector 1)
Min. Switching Capacity None
Leakage Current 0.1 mA max.
Residual Voltage 0.7 V max.
ON Response Time 0.2 ms max.
OFF Response Time 0.6 ms max.
Fuses 2 (1 fuse/common; fuses are not user-replacable.)
Power for External Supply 45 mA 5 to 24 VDC10% min.
(2.8 mA × number of ON outputs)

Input Specifications Rated Input Voltage 24 VDC

(Connector 2)
Operating Input Voltage 20.4 to 26.4 VDC
Input Impedance 5.6 kW
Input Current 4.1 mA (at 24 VDC)
ON Voltage 14.4.0 VDC min.
OFF Voltage 5.0 VDC max.

General Specifications No. of Circuits 2 (dynamic, 64 points/circuit)

Internal Current Consumption 180 mA 5 VDC max.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 130×34.5×100.5 (H×W×D, in millimeters)

170
Specifications Appendix B

Circuit Configuration

24 VDC

STB00

STB07
CN1
COM0
Fuse
12 VDC
Internal STB08
Circuit
STB15
COM1
DATA00

DATA07

COM2 CN2
DATA08

DATA15
COM3

Terminal Connections

CN1 CN2
B A A B
12 12 DATA0 DATA8
NC NC 1 1
11 11 DATA1 DATA9
NC NC 2 2
12 VDC +V1 +V0 12 VDC DATA2 DATA10
10 10 3 3
+ COM1
9 9 COM0 + DATA3 DATA11
4 4
STB15 8 8 STB7 Keyboard, DATA4 DATA12
thumbwheel 5 5
STB14 7 7 STB6 DATA5 DATA13
switch, etc. 6 6
STB13 6 6 STB5 DATA6 DATA14
7 7
STB12 5 5 STB4 DATA7 DATA15
8 8
STB11 4 4 STB3 COM2 COM3
9 9
STB10 3 3 STB2
NC 10 10 NC
STB9 2 2 STB1
NC 11 11 NC
STB8 1 1 STB0
NC 12 12 NC

Keyboard,
thumbwheel
switch, etc.

Note 1. Refer to the Unit’s Operation Manual for details on I/O bit allocation.
2. The Unit will have 128 dynamic output points when pin 1 of it’s DIP switch is ON.
3. Each output terminal has an output resistance of 4.7 kW.
4. At high temperatures, the number of inputs that can be turned ON simultaneously is limited. Refer to the
graph on page 172 for details.
5. The user is not authorized to change the fuse.

171
Specifications Appendix B

High-density I/O Unit Limitations

Limitations on the switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units and the usable
number of I/O points in the C200H-ID215 and C200H-MD215 are shown below.

Switching Capacity
The switching capacity of C200H-OD215/MD115/MD215 Transistor Output Units depends on the power supply
voltage, as shown below.

100

Max. Switching Capacity (mA/pt)

50

16

0
0 4.5 10 20.4 26.4
Power Supply Voltage (V)

Usable I/O Points (C200H-ID215)

To prevent overheating in the C200H-ID215 that can cause early failure of internal components, limit the number of
input points that are ON simultaneously. As shown below, the number of points that can be on simultaneously
depends on both the temperature and the input voltage.
For example, 22 pts with input voltage of 24.0 VDC can be ON at 55°C, but only 16 pts with input voltage of
26.4 VDC can be ON at 55°C. At 24.0 VDC, all 32 input pts can be ON up to 43°C, but at 26.4 VDC all 32 input pts
can be ON up to 34°C.

Input Voltage: 26.4 VDC

32
30 Input Voltage: 24.0 VDC
Input Voltage:
24.0 VDC; 55°,
22 points ON

22
20
Simultaneously Usable Inputs

16
Input Voltage:
26.4 VDC; 55°,
10 16 points ON

Input Voltage: Input Voltage:

26.4 VDC; 34°, 24.0 VDC; 43°,
32 points ON 32 points ON

0
0 10 20 3034 4043 50 55 60
Ambient Temperature (°C)

Note If the Unit is at room temperature it takes about 10 minutes for excessive heat to build up when all inputs are
turned ON, so all inputs can be turned ON simultaneously for testing.

172
Specifications Appendix B

Usable I/O Points (C200H-MD215)

To prevent overheating in the C200H-MD215 and prevent early failure of internal components, limit the number of
input points ON simultaneously. The number of points that can be on simultaneously depends on both the temper-
ature and the input voltage. (There is no limit to the number of output points that can be ON simultaneously.)

16 Input Voltage: 26.4 VDC

15
Input Voltage: Input Voltage: 24.0 VDC
26.4 VDC; 55°,
11 points ON

11
10
Simultaneously Usable Inputs

Input Voltage:
26.4 VDC; 43°,
16 points ON
0
0 10 20 3034 4043 50 55 60
Ambient Temperature (°C)

Note If the Unit is at room temperature it takes about 10 minutes for excessive heat to build up when all inputs are
turned ON, so all inputs can be turned ON simultaneously for testing.

High-density I/O Unit (Special I/O Unit) DIP Switch

Any unused pin can be set to either ON or OFF.
OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6
ON
Pin 6: Not used.
Pin 5: Dynamic data output logic setting
Pin 4: Input response time setting
Pin 3: Minimum pulse width setting of pulse input response
Pin 2: Pulse input setting
Pin 1: Operation mode setting

Pin 1: Operation Mode Setting

Pin 1 is not used for the C200H-ID501 or C200H-ID215.
Pin 1 C200H-OD501/215 C200H-MD501/115/215
OFF 32-point static output mode 16-/16-point output static mode
ON 128-point dynamic output mode 128-point dynamic input mode
Pin 2: Pulse Input Setting
Use pin 2 only for the C200H-ID501, C200H-ID215, C200H-MD501, C200H-MD115, and C200H-MD215. The
C200H-MD501, C200H-MD115, and C200H-MD215 pin 2 settings are effective in static mode only (i.e., pin 1 is set
to OFF).
When this pin is set for pulse inputs, only inputs 08 to 15 of CN2 will be pulse inputs. The response time of any other
input regarded as a normal input is set according to the input response time setting with pin 4.
Pin 2 Function
OFF Normal input
ON Pulse input

173
Specifications Appendix B

Pin 3: Minimum Pulse Width Setting of Pulse Input Response

Use pin 3 only when pin 2 of the C200H-ID501, C200H-ID215, C200H-MD501, C200H-MD115, and C200H-
MD215 is set to ON (i.e., when pulse input is set).
Pin 3 Minimum response input pulse width
OFF 1 ms
ON 4 ms

Pin 4: Input Response Time Setting

Use pin 4 for the C200H-ID501, C200H-ID215, C200H-MD501, C200H-MD115, and C200H-MD215 only.
Pin 4 Input response time
OFF 2.5 ms max.
ON 15 ms max.

Pin 5: Dynamic Data Output Logic Setting

Use pin 5 only when the C200H-OD501 or C200H-OD215 is in dynamic output mode (i.e., when pin 1 is set to ON).
Pin 5 Data output
OFF Negative logic output
ON Positive logic output

DIP Switch Settings for High-density I/O Unit (Special I/O Unit)
Model Pin 1 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin 4 Pin 5 Pin 6
C200H-ID501/215 Setting is Must be set Set when Must be set Setting is Setting is
not required pulse input not required not required
is used
C200H-OD501/215 OFF Setting is Setting is Setting is Setting is Setting is
not required not required not required not required not required
ON Setting is Setting is Setting is Must be set Setting is
not required not required not required not required
C200H-MD501/115/215 OFF Must be set Set when Must be set Setting is Setting is
pulse input not required not required
is used
ON Setting is Setting is Setting is Setting is Setting is
not required not required not required not required not required

174
Specifications Appendix B

Analog Timer Unit C200H-TM001

Item Specifications
Oscillation Method CR oscillation
Time Setting Range Use the DIP switch to set any of the following four ranges, according to the chart shown on
the next page.
0.1 to 1 second (typical)
1 to 10 seconds (typical)
10 to 60 seconds (typical)
1 to 10 minutes (typical)
Timer Pause Function The timing operation can be paused if so specified by the program. Therefore, the timers can
also be used as cumulative registers.
Number of Timer Points 4
Indicators SET and TIME UP
External Variable External variable resistors can be used to set the time value when the IN/EXT selector is set
Resistor to OFF (EXT). Use 20 kW variable resistors.
Bit Allocation Bit Function The word is determined by the system configuration.

00 T0 start output
01 T1 start output
“1” when time is running
02 T2 start output
03 T3 start output
04 T0 pause output
05 T1 pause output 0 Operates
06 T2 pause output 1 Stops
07 T3 pause output
08 T0 time-up input
09 T1 time-up input
“1” when time is up
10 T2 time-up input
11 T3 time-up input
12
13
Cannot be used
14
15

Programming and Timer start input Timer start

Timing Chart Timer setting input
(word n bits 00
word n bits 08 through 11 through 03)
Time-up output Time-up
output
Time-up flag
Timer set value
Internal Current 60 mA 5 VDC max.
Consumption

175
Specifications Appendix B

Internal variable
resistors TM001 Indicators
These variable re- The SET indicators in the top row light when the cor-
sistors are used to responding timer is operating. The TIME UP indica-
set the timers. The tors in the bottom row light when the corresponding
settings of these re- timer (T0 through T3) turns ON.
sistors are effective
only when the cor- 1
0
responding IN/EXT Time range setting
selector is ON. To
set or adjust the
time, use the 2 3
screwdriver
supplied with the
Unit. Turn the vari-
able resistor clock-
wise to increase the
time value. The
numbers 0 through
3 correspond to T0
through T3, respec-
tively.

Min.

1
External variable resistor connectors
2 External variable resistors can also be used to set the
Max. timers. The IN/EXT selector pin must be set to the
OFF position. Numbers 0 through 3 correspond to T0
3 through T3, respectively. Use 20-kW variable resistors
and AWG 22 to 28 lead wires. The connector has sol-
derless terminals and must be wired as shown below.

IN/EXT selectors
When the internal variable resis-
tor is used, set the correspond-
ing pin to ON; when an external
variable resistor is used, set the
corresponding pin to OFF. Pin
numbers 4 through 1 correspond
to T0 through T3, respectively.

Timers Pin 0.1 to 1 s 0.1 to 10 s 10 to 60 s 1 to 10 m

T0 8 0 1 0 1
7 0 0 1 1
T1 6 0 1 0 1
5 0 0 1 1
T2 4 0 1 0 1
3 0 0 1 1
T3 2 0 1 0 1
1 0 0 1 1

(0: OFF 1: ON)

176
Specifications Appendix B

External variable
resistor connector

External variable
resistor

! Caution Ensure that the external variable resistor connectors are open when using the internal variable
resistor.

Standard B7A Interface Unit C200H-B7AI1/B7AO1

The Standard B7A Interface Unit used with the B7A Link Terminal allows the transmission and reception of
16-point I/O data over two wires.
The following Standard B7A Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal models are available.

B7A Interface Unit B7A Link Terminals

16-point input: C200H-B7AI1 B7A-T6j1 (Screw terminal models)
B7A-T6D2 (Modular models)
16-point output: C200H-B7AO1 B7A-R6jj1 (Screw terminal models)
B7A-R6A52 (Modular models)

Mount the B7A Interface Unit to the C200H-BCjj1-V1 or C200H-BCjj1-V2 Backplane.

Note If the B7A Interface Unit is connected to the C200HS-CPU03/CPU23-E/CPU33-E or C200H-PS211, supply
24 VDC from an independent power supply to the B7A Interface Unit or use a transformer to separate the
power supply line to the B7A Interface Unit from the power supply lines to the CPU and I/O Power Supply
Unit.

I/O indicator

ERR indicator

Connection terminals

Connection terminals for the B7A Link Terminal:

Connect this terminal to the SIG terminal of the
B7A Link Terminal.
Connect this terminal to the negative power ter-
minal of the B7A Link Terminal.

Supply 12 to 24 VDC.
12 to 24 VDC

177
Specifications Appendix B

I/O Indicator
Indicates the ON or OFF status of input from the B7A Link Terminal or the ON and OFF status of output to the B7A
Link Terminal.
ERR Indicator
Incorporated by the B7AI1 and lit when the B7AI1’s data transmission or reception is abnormal.
Connection Terminals
SIG: Connects to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.
V–: Connects to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link Terminal.

! Caution If the terminals are not connected correctly, the internal circuitry of the B7A Link Terminal will be
damaged.

Note 1. The transmission cable must be a VCTF cable with a thickness of 0.75 mm2 minimum.
2. Do not wire power lines or high-tension lines along with the transmission cable in the same conduit.
Input Mode Selector
The B7AI1 incorporates an input mode selector on the back panel of the Unit, with which the following modes can
be set.
Input mode 15 points + 1 error 16 points
Function Fifteen-point input from the B7A Link Sixteen-point input from the B7A Link
Terminal is effective. Bit 15 is used as Terminal is effective.
transmission error bit.
Switch setting Upper side Lower side
Bit no. 00 to 14 Input 00 to input 14 Input 00 to input 14
ll i
allocation 15 Transmission error bit Input 15
Status of input indicator lamp 15 Not used Lit when input 15 is ON. Not lit when
input 15 is OFF.
Status of the ERR indicator Lit when there is a transmission error and OFF during normal transmission

The ERR indicator is lit when an error occurs. If the error is corrected, the ERR indicator is OFF at the next trans-
mission cycle.
When there is a transmission error, the B7A Link Terminal will hold the data just before the occurrence of the trans-
mission error. If there is a transmission error because the B7A Link Terminal is turned off, however, data 0 is trans-
mitted in the first transmission cycle when the B7A Link Terminal is turned on again.
Transmission errors between the C200H-B7AO1 and B7A Link Terminal are detected by the B7A Link Terminal
only. Check the ERR indicator and error bit for any error.
Performance Specifications
Item C200H-B7AI1 C200H-B7AO1
I/O points 16 points or 15 points and 1 error 16 output points
input
Transmission distance 500 m max. if power is supplied to the Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal
separately.
100 m max. if power is supplied to the Interface Unit and B7A Link Terminal
from a single power supply. (24 VDC±10%)
Transmission delay Typ. 19.2 ms, 31 ms max.
Minimum input time (see note 1) --- 16 ms
Internal current consumption 5 VDC, 100 mA max.
External power supply (see note 2) 12 to 24 VDC ±10%, 10 mA min. 12 to 24 VDC ±10%, 30 mA min.
Weight 200 g max.
Note 1. The minimum input time refers to the minimum time required for reading the input signals from the CPU.
The ON/OFF width of the signal transmitted from the CPU to the output relay of the B7A Interface Unit
should be set to a value larger than the minimum input time.
2. The value of the external power supply does not include the value required by the B7A Link Terminal.

178
Specifications Appendix B

Group-2 B7A Interface Units (C200H-B7Ajj)

A Group-2 B7A Interface Unit used with two or four B7A Link Terminals allows the transmission and reception of
32-point or 64-point I/O data over two-conductor cables.

Group-2 B7A Interface Unit

C200HS

CPU

Input B7A Link Terminal

Sensor
Transmission distance: Switch
500 m max. Output B7A Link Terminal

Lamps and other loads

Group-2 B7A Interface Units can be mounted to a CPU Rack or an Expansion I/O Rack. They cannot be mounted
to Slave Racks or to Racks controlled by any other CPUs.
The words allocated to Group-2 B7A Interface Units are determined by I/O number set on the Units. Units with 32
I/O points are allocated two words; Units with 64 I/O points are allocated four words.
Refer to the B7A Link Terminals Datasheet for more information on B7A Link Terminals.

Models
The following Group-2 B7A Interface Units are available.
B7A Interface Unit Inputs Outputs
C200H-B7A12 32 points None
C200H-B7A02 None 32 points
C200H-B7A21 16 points 16 points
C200H-B7A22 32 points 32points

179
Specifications Appendix B

Connectable B7A Link Terminals

Only 16-point B7A Link Terminals can be connected to a B7A Interface Unit.

Input Terminals
Type Model Transmission delay
Screw terminals B7A-T6j1 Standard ((19.2 ms))
B7AS-T6j1
B7A-T6j6 High-speed
g p ((3 ms))
B7AS-T6j6
Modular B7A-T6D2 Standard (19.2 ms)
B7A-T6D7 High-speed (3 ms)
PC connectors B7A-TjE3 Standard (19.2 ms)
B7A-TjE8 High-speed (3 ms)

Output Terminals
Type Model Transmission delay
Screw terminals B7A-R6jj1 Standard ((19.2 ms))
B7AS-R6jj1
B7A-R6jj6 High-speed
g p ((3 ms))
B7AS-R6jj6
Modular B7A-R6A52 Standard (19.2 ms)
B7A-R6A57 High-speed (3 ms)
PC connectors B7A-RjAj3 Standard (19.2 ms)
B7A-RjAj8 High-speed (3 ms)

Note 1. Do not connect Terminals with different transmission delays to the same Interface Unit. Doing so will
cause a transmission error.
2. The 10-point B7A Link Terminals and mixed-I/O B7A Link Terminals with 8 inputs and 8 outputs cannot
be connected to B7A Interface Units. Use 16-point B7A Link Terminals. The 16-point B7A Link Terminals
include 16-point (non-mixed) Terminals, 32-point Terminals configured with two 16-point circuits, and
mixed-I/O Terminals with 16 inputs and 16 outputs.

Comparison between Standard and Group-2 B7A Interface Units

Type
yp Models Word allocations Connectable B7A Link Terminals
Transmission Transmission Points
delay errors
Standard C200H-B7AI1 Same as I/O Units (in order Standard Input status 16-point
mounted)
mounted). types only held Terminals only
C200H-B7AO2 (19.2 ms) automatically ((see note 2))
Group-2 C200H-B7A12 Words 030 to 049 allocated Standard Switch setting
according to I/O number setting (19 2 ms) and
(19.2 to hold or
C200H-B7A02 (same as Group-2
Group 2 High-density
High density I/O high speed
high-speed reset Input
C200H-B7A21 Units) (3 ms) types status.
(set via
C200H-B7A22 switch)

Note 1. Mount the C200H-B7AO1 B7A Interface Unit to the C200H-BCjj1-V1 or C200H-BCjj1-V2 Back-
plane.
2. The 10-point B7A Link Terminals and mixed-I/O B7A Link Terminals with 8 inputs and 8 outputs cannot
be connected to B7A Interface Units. The 16-point (non-mixed) Terminals, 32-point Terminals config-
ured with the two 16-point circuits, and mixed-I/O Terminals with 16 inputs and 16 outputs can be con-
nected.

180
Specifications Appendix B

Parts and Names (C200H-B7A22 shown below)

Front
I/O number switch
This switch determines the words allocated to the
Unit.

Status indicators
The indicators depend on the model of B7A Inter-
face Unit.

Connection terminals
Connect to the SIG terminal of the B7A Link Terminal
and to the negative power terminal of the B7A Link
Terminal. The actual use of these terminals depends
on the B7A Interface Unit.

External Power Supply Terminals

Supply 12 to 24 VDC.

12toto2424
12 VDC
VDC

Back

DIP switch
Used to set the transmission delay,
transmission error processing mode, in-
put mode, and ERROR indicator opera-
tion.

181
Specifications Appendix B

Indicator Operation
The indicators depend on the model of B7A Interface Unit, as shown below.

Name Color Function

ERROR 1 Input Red Lights when an error occurs in transmissions from an Input B7A Link Terminal.
ERROR 2 transmission For the B7A12/22, ERROR 1 is for the first word allocated to the B7A Interface
ERROR error Unit; ERROR 2 is for the second word.
3ms Transmission Orange Lit when the transmission delay is set to the high-speed setting (3 ms).
delay setting Not lit when the transmission delay is set to the standard setting (19.2 ms).
LOAD OFF Transmission Orange Lit when the processing for transmission errors is set to reset input status.
error process Not lit when the processing for transmission errors is set to hold input status.
15IN+ERR Input mode Orange Lit when the input mode mode is set to use 15 inputs and 1 error input.
setting Not lit when the input mode mode is set to use 16 inputs.

I/O Number Setting

The setting of the I/O number determines the words allocated to the Interface Unit. Set the I/O number to between
0 and 9.

Setting in direction
of notch

Note 1. Turn off the power supply to the PC before changing the I/O number setting. Any new setting will not be
effective until the next time the power supply is turned on.
2. Use a flat-blade screw driver to change the I/O number setting. Be careful not to leave the switch halfway
between settings and be careful not to damage the switch.
The following table shows the words allocated according to the I/O number. The 32-point Units are the
C200H-B7A12, C200H-B7A02, and C200H-B7A21. The 64-point Unit is the C200H-B7A22.
I/O No. Words
32-point Units 64-point Unit
0 IR 030 and IR 031 IR 030 to IR 033
1 IR 032 and IR 033 IR 032 to IR 035
2 IR 034 and IR 035 IR 034 to IR 037
3 IR 036 and IR 037 IR 036 to IR 039
4 IR 038 and IR 039 IR 038 to IR 041
5 IR 040 and IR 041 IR 040 to IR 043
6 IR 042 and IR 043 IR 042 to IR 045
7 IR 044 and IR 045 IR 044 to IR 047
8 IR 046 and IR 047 IR 046 to IR 049
9 IR 048 and IR 049 Do not use.

Note 1. Be sure that the same words are not allocated to more than one Unit. For example, if you set a 64-point
Unit to I/O number 0, you cannot use I/O number 1 for any Unit.
2. The above words are also allocated to Group-2 High-density I/O Units. Be sure that the same words are
not allocated to more than one Unit.

182
Specifications Appendix B

DIP Switch Settings

Set the DIP switch as described before for the various models of B7A Interface Units.

C200H-B7A22/12
Pin Function OFF ON
1 Transmission delay Standard (19.2 ms) High-speed (3 ms)
2 Transmission error process Hold status Reset Inputs
Factory setting 3 Input mode 16 inputs 15 inputs + error input
(pins 4 and 5 ON) 4 ERROR 1 indicator enable Disabled Enabled
5 ERROR 2 indicator enable Disabled Enabled
6 Not used. NA NA

C200H-B7A21
Pin Function OFF ON
1 Transmission delay Standard (19.2 ms) High-speed (3 ms)
2 Transmission error process Hold status Reset Inputs
Factory setting
3 Input mode 16 inputs 15 inputs + error input
(pin 5 ON)
4 ERROR indicator enable Disabled Enabled
5 Not used. NA NA
6 Not used. NA NA

C200H-B7A02
Pin Function OFF ON
1 Transmission delay Standard (19.2 ms) High-speed (3 ms)
2 Not used. NA NA
Factory setting
3 Not used. NA NA
(all pins OFF)
4 Not used. NA NA
5 Not used. NA NA
6 Not used. NA NA

Transmission Delay
Pin 1 is used to set the transmission delay. The same delay is used for all words allocated to the Unit.

Set the transmission delay to match that of the B7A Link Terminal. A transmission error will occur if the same trans-
mission delay is not set.

The “3ms” indicator will be lit whenever the high-speed (3 ms) transmission delay is set.

Transmission Error Process

Pin 2 is used to turned ON to specify resetting input status when transmission errors occur. If pin 2 is turned OFF,
input status will be held when transmission errors occur.

The LOAD OFF indicator will be lit whenever pin 2 is turned ON.

Input Mode
Pin 3 is turned ON to specify use of only 15 inputs and the use of bit 15 as a Transmission Error Flag. If pin 3 is OFF,
16 normal inputs can be used.

The “15IN+ERR” indicator will be lit whenever pin 3 is turned ON.

ERROR Indicators
Pin 4 or pins 4 and 5 are turned ON to enable the ERROR, ERROR 1, and/or ERROR 2 indicators. These indica-
tors will not light even if a transmission error occurs if the corresponding pin is turned OFF.

183
Specifications Appendix B

Transmission Error Precautions

Startup
The Transmission Error Flag for the B7A Interface Unit will be OFF when power is turned on to the C200HS. If
normal transmissions with the B7A Link Terminal are not possible within about 10 ms, the Transmission Error Flag
(bit 15) will turn ON (i.e., if its operation is enabled by the input mode setting).
All input bits will remain OFF until normal transmissions are achieved.
Inputs
When a transmission error occurs, input status will be either held or all inputs will be reset according to the setting
for the transmission error process, and the Transmission Error Flag (bit 15) will turn ON (i.e., if its operation is
enabled by the input mode setting). The Transmission Error Flag will go OFF and the input status will return to
normal when normal transmissions are achieved again.
Outputs
Transmission errors for Output B7A Link Terminals are not detected at the B7A Interface Unit and must be con-
firmed using the error indicators or error outputs on the Link Terminal.

184
Specifications Appendix B

Wiring
Terminal Names and Allocations
The use of the terminals depends on the model of the B7A Interface Unit. “m” indicates the first word allocated to
the Unit according to the I/O number setting and can be calculated as follows:
m = 030 + (2 x I/O number)
C200H-B7A22
Terminal Name Function Word
B0 SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal. m
B1 – OUT1 Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
B2 SIG OUT2 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal. m+1
B3 – OUT2 Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
B4 SIG IN1 Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal. m+2
B5 – IN1 Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
B6 SIG IN2 Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal. m+3
B7 – IN2 Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
B8 NC Not used. NA
A0 to A7
B9 +V Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
A8 –V Connect to – terminal on external power supply.

C200H-B7A21
Terminal Name Function Word
B0 SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal. m
B1 – OUT1 Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
B2, B3 NC Not used. NA
B4 SIG IN1 Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal. m+1
B5 – IN1 Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
B6 to B8 NC Not used. NA
A0 to A7
B9 +V Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
A8 –V Connect to – terminal on external power supply.

C200H-B7A12
Terminal Name Function Word
B0 SIG IN1 Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal. m
B1 – IN1 Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
B2, B3 NC Not used. NA
B4 SIG IN2 Connect to SIG terminal on Input B7A Link Terminal. m+1
B5 – IN2 Connect to – power supply terminal on Input B7A Link
Terminal.
B6 to B8 NC Not used. NA
A0 to A7
B9 +V Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
A8 –V Connect to – terminal on external power supply.

185
Specifications Appendix B

C200H-B7A02
Terminal Name Function Word
B0 SIG OUT1 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal. m
B1 – OUT1 Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
B2, B3 NC Not used. NA
B4 SIG OUT2 Connect to SIG terminal on Output B7A Link Terminal. m+1
B5 – OUT2 Connect to – power supply terminal on Output B7A Link
Terminal.
B6 to B8 NC Not used. NA
A0 to A7
B9 +V Connect to + terminal on external power supply.
A8 –V Connect to – terminal on external power supply.

Recommended Cables and Transmission Distance

The following cables are recommended to connect the B7A Interface Unit to B7A Link Terminals. The wiring meth-
od and transmission distance depend on the transmission delay and on whether or not a common power supply is
being used for the B7A Link Terminal and the Interface Unit.
Standard Transmission Delays (19.2 ms): Cab-tire Cable
Power supply Cable Transmission distance
Common VCTF, 0.75 mm2 x 3 conductors 100 m max.
Separate VCTF ,0.75 mm2 x 2 conductors 500 m max.

High-speed Transmission Delays (3 ms): Shielded Cable

Power supply Cable Transmission distance
Common Shielded cable, 0.75 mm2 x 3 conductors 50 m max.
Separate Shielded cable, 0.75 mm2 x 2 conductors 100 m max.

Terminal Construction
Use hook-type crimp connectors with a line thickness of 0.25 to 1.65 mm2. The
construction of the terminals is shown in the illustration.

Wiring Method
Standard Transmission Delays (19.2 ms)
Common Power Supply
B7A Link Terminal
B7A Interface Unit

Transmission distance: 100 m max.

B7A Link Terminal

Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75 mm2 or higher

24 VDC±10%

186
Specifications Appendix B

Separate Power Supplies B7A Link Terminal

B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 VDC

Transmission distance: 500 m max.

B7A Link Terminal

12 to 24 VDC

Transmission cable: VCTF 0.75 mm2 or higher

12 to 24 VDC

High-speed Transmission Delays (3 ms): Shielded Cable

Common Power Supply B7A Link Terminal

B7A Interface Unit

Transmission distance: 50 m max.

B7A Link Terminal

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher
GND

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher

24 VDC±10% GND

Separate Power Supplies B7A Link Terminal

B7A Interface Unit
12 to 24 VDC

Transmission distance: 100 m max.

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher B7A Link Terminal

GND
12 to 24 VDC

Shielded cable: 0.75 mm2 or higher

12 to 24 VDC GND

Note 1. We recommend grounding the shielded cable.

2. If shielded cable is not used, the maximum transmission distance is 10 m regardless of whether a com-
mon or separate power supplies are used. Use 0.75 mm2 or higher VCTF cable.
3. To prevent noise on the transmission cable, do not lay it near power cables or high-voltage lines.

187
Specifications Appendix B

Specifications
Item C200H-B7A12 C200H-B7A02 C200H-B7A21 C200H-B7A22
I/O points 32 input points or 32 output points 16 output points and 32 output points and
30 input points and 2 16 input points or 32 input points or
error inputs 15 input points + 1 30 input points + 2
error input error inputs
Transmission One-way distributed multiplex transmission
method
Transmission Standard: 500 m max.
distance (see High-speed: 100 m max.
note 1)
Transmission Standard: Typ. 19.2 ms, 31 ms max.
delay High-speed: Typ. 3 ms, 5 ms max.
Minimum input Standard: 16 ms
time (see note High-speed: 2.4 ms
2)
Internal current 5 VDC, 100 mA max.
consumption
External power 12 to 24 VDC ±10%
supply (see
note 3) 0.05 A min. 0.06 A min. 0.05 A min. 0.08 A min.
Weight 300 g max.
Dimensions 35 x 130 x 128 mm (W x H x D)

Note 1. The transmission distance also depends on whether a common or separate power supplies are used.
2. The minimum input time refers to the minimum time required for reading the input signals from the CPU.
The ON/OFF width of the signal transmitted from the CPU to the output relay of the B7A Interface Unit
should be set to a value larger than the minimum input time.
3. The capacity of the external power supply does not include the capacity required by the B7A Link Termi-
nal.

Maximum Current and Power Supplied

There are limits to the current and power that can be supplied to each Rack and Unit. When designing the system,
take the current consumption into account.
Follow the chart below and be careful that the total current consumption does not exceed the maximum current
and maximum total power supplied.
Current Supplied
Name Model number Max. current supplied Maximum power
supplied
5V 26 V 24 V
(internal logic (relay drive (No-voltage
current) current) contact current)
CPU Rack C200HS-CPU01-E/ 3.9 A 0.6 A 0.8 A 23.5 to 26.5 W
CPU01-EC/CPU21-E/ (See conditions
CPU21-EC/CPU31-E below.)
C200HS-CPU03-E/ 2.3 A 0.6 A --- 21.5 W
CPU23-E/CPU33-E
Expansion C200H-PS221/ 2.7 A 0.6 A 0.8 A 28 W
I/O Rack PS221-C
C200H-PS211 --- 23 W
Slave Rack C200H-RT001-P 2.7 A 0.6 A 0.8 A 28 W
C200H-RT002-P --- 23 W
C200H-RT201 0.8 A 28 W
C200H-RT202 --- 23 W

188
Specifications Appendix B

Note The figures shown in the “maximum current supplied” and “maximum power supplied” columns are com-
puted with the power consumed by the Backplanes, CPU, Memory Cassettes, Peripheral Devices, I/O
Power Supply Units, and Slave Units already calculated.
Design the system so that the following conditions are satisfied.
Condition 1
(1) (Total current consumption of all Units in the 5-V system) ≤ (the figure in the
5-V column)
(2) (Total current consumption of all Units in the 26-V system) ≤ (the figure in the
26-V column)
(3) (Total current consumption of all Units in the 24-V system) ≤ (the figure in the
24-V column)
Condition 2
(1) x 5 V + (2) x 26 V + (3) x 24 ≤ (maximum power supplied)
In the C200HS-CPU01-E/CPU01-EC/CPU21-E/CPU21-EC/CPU31-E, the
maximum power drawn from the 5-V power supply depends upon the current
consumption, as shown below.
Max. Power vs. Current Supplied
C200HS-CPU01-E/CPU01-EC/CPU21-E/CPU21-EC/CPU31-E
(W)

26.5
Total Power Consumption (W)

23.5

0
0 2.3 3.9 (A)
Current Drawn from 5-V Supply (A)
Calculating Current and Power Consumption
The method of calculating current and power consumption is demonstrated here using the following Unit combina-
tions as examples.
Example 1: Units Mounted to C200HS-CPU01-E CPU Rack
OC221 Contact Output Units: 4 Units
ID001 No-voltage Input Units: 3 Units
LK202 Host Link Unit: 1 Unit
External power supply used: 0.3 A
Power Supply Current Consumption Power Consumption
5-V system 0.001 x 7 + 0.25 = 0.32 A (≤ 3.9 A) 0.32 A x 5 V = 1.6 W
26-V system 0.075 x 4 = 0.30 A (≤ 0.6 A) 0.30 A x 26 V = 7.8 W
24-V system 0.06 x 3 + 0.3 = 0.48 A (≤ 0.8 A) 0.48 A x 24 V = 11.52 W
Total = 20.92 W (≤ 26.5 W)
Example 2: Units Mounted to C200H-PS221 Expansion I/O Rack
ID212 DC Input Units: 6 Units
CT002 High-speed Counter Units: 2 Units
External power supply used (for ID212): 0.8 A
Power Supply Current Consumption Power Consumption
5-V system 0.01 x 6 + 0.3 x 2 = 0.66 A (≤ 2.7 A) 0.66 A x 5 V = 3.3 W
26-V system 0 0
24-V system Ext. power supply = 0.8 A (≤ 0.8 A) 0.8 A x 24 V = 19.2 W

189
Specifications Appendix B

Total = 22.5 W (≤ 28 W)
Example 3: Units Mounted to C200HS-CPU01-E CPU Rack
OC221 Contact Output Units: 4 Units
ID217 High-density Input Unit: 1 Unit
OD219 High-density Output Unit: 1 Unit
CT002 High-speed Counter Unit: 1 Unit
External power supply used (for ID217): 0.3 A
Power Supply Current Consumption Power Consumption
5-V system 0.01 x 4 + 0.12 + 0.27 +0.3
= 0.73 A (≤ 3.9 A) 0.73 A x 5 V = 3.65 W
26-V system 0.075 x 4 = 0.30 A (≤ 0.6 A) 0.3 A x 26 V = 7.8 W
24-V system Ext. power supply = 0.8 A (≤ 0.8 A) 0.8 A x 24 V = 19.2 W
Total = 18.65 W (≤ 26.5 W)
Calculating Power Consumption for Racks
The total power consumption (primary power input) for an individual Rack can be
broadly calculated as shown in the following examples.
Example 1: CPU Rack
Total power consumption of Units + 3.5
0.6 x 0.55 (1) (VA)
3.5 = CPU power consumption
0.6 = 60% efficiency
0.55 (1) = Power rate (Number in parentheses: when CPU03 is used.)
Example 2: All Other Racks
Total power consumption of Units + 2
0.6 x 0.55 (1) (VA)
2 = I/O Power Supply Unit (Remote I/O Slave Unit) power consumption
0.6 = 60% efficiency
0.55 (1) = Power rate (Number in parentheses: when PS211, RT002-P or RT202
is used.)
Current Drawn from 5-V Unit Model number Current
Supply (Standard I/O Units) consumption
DC Input C200H-ID211 0.01 A each
C200H-ID212
No-Voltage Contact C200H-ID001
Input C200H-ID002
AC Input C200H-IA121
C200H-IA122/IA122V
C200H-IA221
C200H-IA222/IA222V
AC/DC Input C200H-IM211
C200H-IM212
Contact Output C200H-OC221
C200H-OC222
C200H-OC223
C200H-OC224
C200H-OC225 0.05 A
C200H-OC222V 0.008 A
C200H-OC224V 0.01 A
C200H-OC226 0.03 A

190
Specifications Appendix B

Unit Model number Current

consumption
Transistor Output C200H-OD411 0.14 A
C200H-OD211 0.16 A
C200H-OD212 0.18 A
C200H-OD213 0.14 A
C200H-OD214
C200H-OD216 0.01 A each
C200H-OD217
C200H-OD21A 0.16 A
Triac Output
p C200H-OA121-E 0.14 A
C200H-OA122-E 0.18 A
C200H-OA221 0.14 A
C200H-OA223 0.18 A
C200H-OA222V 0.20 A
C200H-OA224 0.27 A
Analog Timer C200H-TM001 0.06 A
Standard B7A Interface C200H-B7AI1 0.10 A
C200H-B7AO1
Interrupt Input C200HS-INT01 0.02 A
Current Drawn from 5-V Unit Model number Current
Supply for Group-2 consumption
High-density I/O Units
DC Input
p C200H-ID111 0.12 A
C200H-ID216 0.1 A
C200H-ID217 0.12 A
C200H-ID218 0.1 A
C200H-ID219 0.12 A
Transistor Output
p C200H-OD218 0.18 A
C200H-OD219 0.27 A
C200H-OD21B 0.18 A
Current Drawn from 5-V Unit Model number Current
Supply for Group-2 B7A consumption
Interface Units
B7A Interface Unit C200H-B7A12/02 0.10 A
(G 2U
(Group-2 i )
Units) C200H-B7A21/22
Current Drawn from 5-V Unit Model number Current
Supply for Special I/O Units consumption
TTL Input C200H-ID501 0.13 A
DC Input C200H-ID215
TTL Output C200H-OD501 0.22 A
Transistor Output C200H-OD215
TTL I/O C200H-MD501 0.18 A
DC Input/Transistor C200H-MD115
Output C200H-MD215
High-speed Counter C200H-CT001-V1 0.30 A
C200H-CT002
Position Control C200H-NC111 0.15 A
C200H-NC112
C200H-NC211 0.50 A
Analog Input C200H-AD001 0.55 A
C200H-AD002 0.45 A

191
Specifications Appendix B

Unit Model number Current

consumption
Analog Output C200H-DA001 0.65 A
C200H-DA002 0.60 A
Temperature
p Control C200H-TC001 0.33 A
C200H-TC002
C200H-TC003
C200H-TC101
C200H-TC102
C200H-TC103
Heat/Cool Temperature
p C200H-TV001 0.33 A
C
Control
l C200H-TV002
C200H-TV003
C200H-TV101
C200H-TV102
C200H-TV103
PID Control C200H-PID01 0.33 A
C200H-PID02
C200H-PID03
Temperature Sensor C200H-TS001/TS002 0.45 A
Input C200H-TS101/TS102
ASCII C200H-ASC02 0.20 A
Voice Output C200H-OV001 0.30 A
ID Sensor C200H-IDS01-V1 0.25 A
C200H-IDS21
Fuzzy Logic C200H-FZ001 0.30 A
Cam Positioner C200H-CP114 0.30 A

Current Drawn from 5-V Unit Model number Current

Supply for Other Units consumption
Host Link C200H-LK101-PV1 0.25 A
C200H-LK201-V1 0.15 A
C200H-LK202-V1 0.25 A
PC Link C200H-LK401 0.35 A
Remote Master C200H-RM001-PV1 0.20 A
C200H-RM201 0.25 A
SYSMAC LINK C200HW-SLK13/SLK14/SLK23/ 0.80 A
SLK24
SYSMAC NET Link C200HS-SNT32 1.00 A
Power Supply Adapter C200H-APS01/APS02/APS03 0A
CompoBus/S Master C200HW-SRM21 0.15 A
DeviceNet Master C200HW-DRM21 0.25 A

192
Specifications Appendix B

Current Drawn from 26-V Unit Model number Current

Supply consumption
Contact Output C200H-OC221/OC222/OC223/ 0.075 A/8 points that
OC224/OC225 turn ON
simultaneously
C200H-OC222V/OC224V/ 0.09 A/8 points that
OC226 turn ON
simultaneously
Transistor Output C200H-OD216/OD217 0.075 A/8 points that
turn ON
simultaneously
ID Sensor C200H-IDS01-V1/IDS21 0.12 A
Current Drawn from 24-V Unit Model number Current
Supply consumption
No-Voltage Contact C200H-ID001/ID002 0.06 A each
Input

Dimensions
Racks
The dimensions shown below are for both the CPU Rack and Expansion I/O Rack. The C dimension for the Pro-
gramming Console will increase by 30mm when the Programming Console Adapter C200H-BP001 is used, and
will increase by 50 mm when the Programming Console Adapter C200H-BP002 is used.

CPU

130

138 A
B

Model A (mm) B (mm) Weight (kg)

C200HS-CPU01-E/CPU01-EC/ 101 113 1.4
CPU03-E
C200HS-CPU21-E/CPU21-EC/ 126 138 1.5
CPU23-E/CPU31-E/CPU33-E

Memory Cassette

73.2

44 9.1

193
Specifications Appendix B

C200H-PS221/PS221-C/PS211 I/O Power Supply Unit

130

138 101
113

Backplane

130

W
17

Model Width (W) Weight

C200H-BC031-V2 260 mm 0.8 kg max.
C200H-BC051-V2 330 mm 1.0 kg max.
C200H-BC081-V2 435 mm 1.3 kg max.
C200H-BC101-V2 505 mm 1.5 kg max.

I/O Connecting Cables

The dimensions shown below are for I/O Connecting Cables.

74 64

49
15

Cable Length (L)

C200H-CN311 30 cm
C200H-CN711 70 cm
C200H-CN221 2m
C200H-CN521 5m
C200H-CN131 10 m

194
Specifications Appendix B

C200H-PRO27 Programming Console

The dimensions shown below are for the Programming Console.

192

96
(30)
48

C200H-CN222/CN422, C200HS-CN222/CN422 Connecting Cable

33

29 12 2000 (4000)

Standard I/O Units

The dimensions shown below are for the three shapes of Standard I/O Units mentioned throughout these specifi-
cations.

10-terminal Terminal Block (A-shape I/O Units)

195
Specifications Appendix B

19-terminal Terminal Block (B-shape I/O Units)

x
x

Backplane
x
x
130

x
x
x
x

128
35 145

10-terminal Terminal Block (E-shape I/O Units)

Backplane
x
130

x
x

121
35
138

19-terminal Terminal Block (Extended B-shape I/O Units)

x
x
Backplane

x
x
130

x
x
x
x

152
35 169

196
Specifications Appendix B

Terminal Dimensions
M3.5

7.3
8.5

Group-2 High-density I/O Units

The dimensions shown below are for the Group-2 High-density I/O Units.

Group-2 High-density I/O Units (C and D Types) Dimensions with Unit Mounted

Backplane
130

118
35 101
Approx. 143

High-density I/O Units (Special I/O Units)

The dimensions shown below are for the High-density I/O Units classified as Special I/O Units.

130

35 101

197
Specifications Appendix B

Dimensions with Unit Mounted

Fujitsu’s Connector is Used G79-jC Connecting Cable is Used

G79-jC

Backplane

Backplane
Connecting Connecting
cable Cable

118 118

Approx. 163 145

Interrupt Input Unit

The dimensions shown below are for the Interrupt Input Unit classified as Special I/O Units.

Backplane

x
x
130

x
x

35 101
118

Standard B7A Interface Unit

The dimensions shown below are for the B7A Interface Unit classified as Special I/O Units.
Backplane

130

35 101
118

198
Specifications Appendix B

Group-2 B7A Interface Units The dimensions shown below are for the Group-2 B7A Interface Units.

Backplane
Analog Timer Unit
The dimensions shown below are for the Analog Timer Unit classified as Special I/O Units.

Backplane
130

35 101
118

199
Specifications Appendix B

Mounting Dimensions
A±0.2
Four (five), M4
B ± 0.2

130 Backplane 118±0.2

68 to 108 80 to 120

130 Backplane 118±0.2

Four (five), M4 W

Model A±0.2 B±0.2 W

C200H-BC031-V2 246 mm --- 260 mm
C200H-BC051-V2 316 mm --- 330 mm
C200H-BC081-V2 421 mm --- 435 mm
C200H-BC101-V2 491 mm 270.5 mm 505 mm

Panel Mounting of C200H-PRO27 Programming Console

Bracket

Two screws

Panel thickness (t = 1.0 to 3.2)

200
Specifications Appendix B

The following is the standard panel cut dimensions for the Programming Console (conforming to DIN 43700).

186 +1.1
0

92 +0.8
0

Use the C200H-ATT01 Mounting Bracket (sold separately) to mount the C200H-PRO27 Programming Console to
panels.

75.5

116

14.1
9.1

Take the space required for the cable into consideration when mounting the Programming Console to panels.

37
15

Approximately 80 mm is
required.

Use either one of the

connectors.

Approximately 70 mm is
required.

201
Specifications Appendix B

RS-232C Port Specifications

RS-232C Specifications The specifications for the RS-232C port are given below. Devices that meet
these specifications can be connected.
Connector Pin Assignments
Pin assignments for the RS-232C port are given in the following table.
Pin Abbreviation Name Direction
1 1 FG Field ground ---
6
2 SD (TXD) Send data Output
3 RD (RXD) Receive data Input
9
4 RS (RTS) Request to send Output
5 5 CS (CTS) Clear to send Input
6 --- Not used. ---
7 --- Not used. ---
8 --- Not used. ---
9 SG Signal ground ---
Connector fitting FG Field ground ---

System Configurations

IBM PC/AT or compatible

(9-pin male connector) C200HS CPU Unit

Plug: XM2D-0901
(9-pin female) RS-232C
port

Hood: XM2S-0913
Recommended
cable Hood: XM2S-0911-E Plug: XM2A–0901 (9-pin male)

Provided with CPU Unit

Connections
The connections between the C200HS and a personal computer are illustrated
below as an example.
C200HS Personal Computer
Signal Pin Pin Signal
No. No.
FG 1 1 CD
SD 2 2 RD
RD 3 3 SD
RS 4 4 ER
CS 5 5 SG
– 6 6 DR
– 7 7 RS
– 8 8 CS
SG 9 9 CI
Shielded cable
D-sub, 9-pin connector D-SUB, 9-pin connector
Male connector on cable Female connector on cable

202
Specifications Appendix B

Applicable Connectors
The following connectors are applicable. One plug and one hood are included
with the CPU.
CPU Unit Connector
Item Model Specifications
Plug XM2A-0901 9-pin male Used together
g ((One
Hood XM2S-0911-E 9-pin, millimeter off each
h provided
id d
screws, with CPU Unit.)
static-resistant

Personal Computer Connector

Item Model Specifications
Plug XM2D-0901 9-pin female Used together
g
Hood XM2S-0913 9-pin, inch screws

Port Specifications
Item Specification
Communications method Half duplex
Sync Start-stop
Baud rate 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, or 19,200 bps
Transmission method Point to point
Transmission distance 15 m max.
Interface EIA RS-232C

One-to-one Link Connections The RS-232C port on the C200HS can be connected to the same port on anoth-
er C200HS. Wire the cable as shown in the diagram below.
C200HS C200HS
Signal Pin Pin Signal
Abb. No. No. Abb.
FG 1 1 FG
SD 2 2 SD
RD 3 3 RD
RS 4 4 RS
CS 5 5 CS
– 6 6 –
– 7 7 –
– 8 8 –
SG 9 9 SG

XM2A–0901 XM2A–0901

Ground the FG terminals of C200HS Units at a resistance of less than 100 Ω.

203
 Glossary

ASCII code [A(merican) S(tandard) C(ode for) I(nformation) I(nterchange)] A standard com-
puter code used to facilitate the interchange of information among various types
of data-processing equipment.

ASCII Unit An Intelligent I/O Unit. The ASCII Unit has its own CPU and 16 kilobytes of
memory. This Unit enables communication between the PC and any other de-
vice which uses ASCII code. The ASCII Unit can be programmed in BASIC.

Backplane A base to which Units are mounted to form a Rack. Backplanes provide a series
of connectors for these Units along with wiring to connect them to the CPU and
Power Supply. Backplanes also provide connectors used to connect them to
other Backplanes. In some Systems, different Backplanes are used for different
Racks; in other Systems, Racks differ only by the Units mounted to them.

back-up A copy of existing data which is valuable if data is accidentally erased.

baud rate Transfer speed between two devices in a system measured in bits per second.
For example, an optical sensor might be configured to send its information to the
personal computer at 9600 baud. It is important for both of the devices to be set
to the same baud rate.

bit The smallest piece of information that can be represented on a computer. A bit
has the value of either zero or one, corresponding to the electrical signals ON
and OFF. A bit is one binary digit.

central processing unit A device that is capable of storing a program and data, and executing the set of
instructions contained in the program. In a PC System, the central processing
unit executes the program, processes I/O signals, communicates with external
devices, etc.

communication cable Cable used to transfer data between components of a control system and con-
forming to the RS-232C or RS-422 standards.

Control System All of the hardware and software components used to control other devices. A
Control System includes the PC System, the PC programs, and all I/O devices
that are used to control or obtain feedback from the controlled system.

counter A PC function that counts the number of occurrences of a certain event.

CPU An acronym for central processing unit.

cycle time The total time it takes the PC to perform internal operations, i.e., reset the watch-
dog timer, read the program, receive input data, send output data, and execute
instructions. Cycle time is monitored by the watchdog timer within the PC, and if
it takes longer than a certain specified amount of time, an error message may be
generated, or the CPU may just stop. Cycle times will differ depending on the
configuration of the system.

data area An area in the PC’s memory that is designed to hold a specific type of data, e.g.,
the LR area is designed to hold common data in a PC Link System.

data link Allows for the connection of up to 32 PCs in a Net Link System where each is
contributing information to a common memory area. Data links may be estab-
lished in the LR and/or DM memory areas.

205
 Glossary

debugging The process of checking for errors in a program.

default condition The original condition of a function or system. For example, the Ladder Support
Software’s (LSS) installation utility will place the LSS in the C:\LSS directory, but
this default condition can be changed so that it places the LSS in a different
directory.

distributed control An automation concept in which control of each portion of an automated system
is located near the devices actually being controlled, i.e., control is decentralized
and “distributed” over the system. Distributed control is a concept basic to PC
Systems.

EEPROM [E(lectrically) E(rasable) P(rogrammable) R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of

ROM in which stored data can be erased and reprogrammed. This is accom-
plished using a special control lead connected to the EEPROM chip and can be
done without having to remove the EEPROM chip from the device in which it is
mounted.

electrical noise Electric ‘static’ that can disturb electronic communications. The ‘snow’ that can
appear on a TV screen is an example of the effects of electrical noise.

EPROM [E(rasable) P(rogrammable) R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of ROM in which

stored data can be erased, by ultraviolet light or other means, and repro-
grammed.

Expansion I/O Unit An I/O Unit for a Package-type PC that provides more I/O points to the PC.

factory computer A general-purpose computer, usually quite similar to a business computer, that
is used in automated factory control.

flag A bit that is turned ON and OFF automatically by the system in order to provide
status information.

High-speed Counter A Special I/O Unit. A High Speed Counter Unit counts independently of the PC’s
cycle time. This allows counting of very short, fast signals.

host computer A computer that is used to transfer data to or receive data from a PC in a Host
Link system. The host computer is used for data management and overall sys-
tem control. Host computers are generally small personal or business comput-
ers.

IBM PC/AT or compatible A computer that has similar architecture to, and is logically compatible with an
IBM PC/XT computer; and that can run software designed for that computer.

instruction line A succession of instructions which begins with a load instruction at the left bus
bar and ends at a right bus bar.

interface An interface is the conceptual boundary between systems or devices and usual-
ly involves changes in the way the communicated data is represented. Interface
devices such as NSBs perform operations such as changing the coding, format,
or speed of data.

I/O devices The devices which are connected to the terminals on I/O Units, Special I/O Units,
or Intelligent I/O Units. I/O devices may be part of the Control System if they
function to help control other devices, or they may be part of the controlled sys-
tem if they interact directly with it.

I/O point The place at which an input signal enters the PC System or an output signal
leaves the PC System. In physical terms, an I/O point corresponds to terminals

206
 Glossary

or connector pins on a Unit; in terms of programming, an I/O point corresponds

to an I/O bit in the IR area.

I/O table Diagram written to the IR memory area listing the type of I/O units controlled by a
PC. It must be cleared before programming or when I/O units are changed.
Tables can be read, verified, or transferred to a EPROM.

I/O Unit The most basic type of Unit mounted to a Backplane. I/O Units include Input
Units and Output Units, each of which is available in a range of specifications.
I/O Units do not include Special I/O Units, Link Units, etc.

Limit Switch A switch that detects when an object has reached the limit of its movement by
actually making contact with the object. Limit Switches are fitted to electric ele-
vators, traveling cranes, etc. to indicate when a certain part of the equipment has
traveled to the specified limit.

Link Unit Any of the Units used to connect a PC to a Link System. These are Remote I/O
Units, I/O Link Units, PC Link Units, Host Link Units, and Net Link Units.

operating mode The Display Terminal Unit can operate in five different modes: Page Read, Ter-
minal. Dynamic Scan, Read/Write, and Self-Diagnosis.

page One complete Display Terminal Unit screen. Two hundred screens can be
stored on one RAM card.

parallel interface The parallel interface uses the RS-232 connector, but is not serial communica-
tion. When parallel mode is selected as the communication mode, up to 16 Dis-
play Terminal Units can be connected to a PC in parallel.

PC An acronym for Programmable Controller.

PCB An acronym for printed circuit board.

PC Link Unit A Unit used to connect two or more PCs together so that they can exchange data
through their LR areas.

Photoelectric Switch A switch that uses light to detect the presence of an object.

Power Supply A Unit that mounts to a Backplane in a Rack PC. It provides power at the voltage
required by the other Units on the Rack.

printed circuit board A board onto which electrical circuits are printed for mounting into a computer or
electrical device.

Programmable Controller A small, computer-like device that can control peripheral equipment, such as an
electric door or quality control devices, based on programming and peripheral
input devices. Any process that can be controlled using electrical signals can be
controlled by a PC. PCs can be used independently or networked together into a
system to control more complex operations.

programming device A peripheral device used to write programs and to input a program to a PC or to
alter or monitor a program already stored in the PC. There are dedicated pro-
gramming devices, such as Programming Consoles, and there are non-dedi-
cated programming devices, such as a host computer.

PROM [P(rogrammable) R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of ROM into which the pro-
gram or data may be written after manufacture, by a customer, but which is fixed
from that time on.

207
 Glossary

PROM Writer A PROM Writer is a device used to write data to ROM, PROM, and EPROM stor-
age chips.

Proximity Switch A switch that uses magnetic induction to measure the distance of a metallic ob-
ject from the front of the switch.

Rack PC A PC that is composed of Units mounted to one or more Racks. This configura-
tion is the most flexible, and most large PCs are Rack PCs. A Rack PC is the
opposite of a Package-type PC, which has all of the basic I/O, storage, and con-
trol functions built into a single package.

RAM [R(andom) A(ccess) M(emory)] RAM will not retain data when power is discon-
nected. Therefore data should not be stored in RAM.

register/registered Storing text and graphics in the RAM/ROM card from a personal computer or the
ASCII Unit. Graphics that have been written to the RAM/ROM card are referred
to as registered messages.

Remote I/O Unit A Unit that extends the distance an Expansion I/O Unit can be from the CPU.

ROM [R(ead) O(nly) M(emory)] A type of digital storage that cannot be written to. A
ROM chip is manufactured with its program or data already stored in it, and it can
never be changed. However, the program or data can be read as many times as
desired.

switching capacity The voltage/current that relay can switch ON and OFF.

stepping motor An output device that rotates according to signals from the Control System. The
rotation is very precise and occurs in pre-defined “steps.”

switch An input device that sends either an ON or OFF signal to the Control System. A
switch can be operated either by a person or by the movement of a piece of
equipment or material.

system configuration The arrangement in which Units in a System are connected. This term refers to
the conceptual arrangement and wiring together of all the devices needed to
comprise the System. In OMRON terminology, system configuration is used to
describe the arrangement and connection of the Units comprising a Control Sys-
tem that includes one or more PCs.

Unit In OMRON PC terminology, the word Unit is capitalized to indicate any product
sold for a PC System. though most of the names of these products end with the
word Unit, not all do, e.g., a Remote Terminal is referred to in a collective sense
as a Unit. Context generally makes any limitations of this word clear.

watchdog timer A special timer inside the CPU that monitors the PC’s cycle time. The watchdog
timer sets a flag if the cycle time becomes longer than a certain specified value.
This is useful if the correct operation of your System depends on a certain maxi-
mum cycle time.

word In digital circuits, a group of bits. Usually a word consists of four, eight, or sixteen
bits. In C-series PCs, a word consists of sixteen bits. Words can be used to store
data, or they can be used for I/O.

work bits Bits in the IR area that are not being used for input or output. These bits can be
used in the program in any way desired.

208
 Index

cycle, 6
A cycle time, 6
ambient temperature, 34
Analog Timer Unit
dimensions, 199 D–E
specifications, 175
assembly dimensions, 193
Backplane, 35, 38 duct work
Connecting Cable, 38 I/O wiring, 57
CPU, 35 power cables, 57
Expansion I/O Rack, 38
EC directives
I/O Units, 36
CPU, 8, 18
mounting the Units, 37
Power Supply Unit, 25
electrical noise, 55
B electrostatic charge, 34
emergency stop circuit, 58
B7A Interface Unit, dimensions, 198
errors
B7A Interface Units CPU Rack, 81
dimensions, 199 Expansion I/O Rack, 81
Group-2 Units, 179 fatal, 79
B7A Link Terminals, 180 initialization, 77
Input Unit, 82
Backplane, 35
message tables, 77–81
Backplane Insulation Plate, 49 non-fatal, 77, 79
battery, Memory Unit, replacement, 90 Output Unit, 83
programming indications, 76
reading and clearing messages, 76

C Expansion I/O Rack, 17, 24

C200H
compatibility with, 13
differences with, 11
F
contact protection circuit, 129 factory computer, 2

control components, 2 fatal operating errors, 79

Control System, 2 fuse

CPU and power supply, replacement, 86
cooling, fan, 34 output, replacement, 86
CPU, 18
components, 18
DIP switch, 22
indicators, 19
G
Memory Cassettes, 23 grounding
operation modes, 23
ground terminal, 48
peripheral device connector, 22
line ground terminal, 48
CPU Rack, 16 wire, 48
current consumption, 188 Group-2 High-density I/O Units, 28
24-V supply, 193 C-shape, 29
26-V supply, 193 D-shape, 29
5-V supply, 189, 190, 191, 192 dimensions, 197

209
 Index

mounting requirements, 41
H DIN track mounting, 41
16Ćmm DIN track, 41
High-density I/O Unit, DIP switch settings, 173 7.3Ćmm DIN track, 41
High-density I/O Units, 30 DIN track mounting bracket, 42
dimensions, 197 procedure, 42
DIP switch settings, 30
limitations, 172
specifications, 154 N–O
unit number settings, 30
non-fatal operating errors, 77, 79
humidity, 34
one-to-one link, wiring, 203
output devices, 4

I P
I/O Unit Cover, 51 PC
I/O Units, 26 block diagram, 5
Group-2 High-density I/O Units, 28 flowchart, 7
High-density I/O Units, 30 operation, 5
role of, 4
DIP switch settings, 30
unit number settings, 30 PCs, cooling, 34
Standard I/O Units, 27 photoelectric switch, 4
inductive load surge suppressor, 56 power consumption, 188
power interruptions, Programmable Controller, 59
input devices, 4
power supply, 25
installation, environment AC power supply, 20, 25
ambient conditions, 34 DC power supply, 21, 26
cooling, 34
precautions, general, xi
cooling fan, 34
Rack clearance, 34 process control computer, 2
Programming Console, 62
interlock circuit, 58
checking initial C200HS operation, 64
Interrupt Input Unit, dimensions, 198 Hand-held, 3
proximity switch, 4

L R
Ladder Support Software, 73 relay, printed circuit board, 88
relays, Output Unit, replacement, 87
leakage current
input, 53 RS-232C, port specifications, 202
output, 54 RS-232C connector, 19
limit switch, 4 RS-232C port
connecting devices, one-to-one link, 203
LSS. See Ladder Support Software specifications, 202, 203
wiring example, 202

M S
servomotor drivers, 3
Memory Cassette, 23
installing, 43 servomotors, 3, 5

models, C200HS, 93 short-circuit protection, 54

Slave Rack, 17
mounting, Racks
conduit, 39 solenoid, 5
preventing noise, 35 Special I/O Units, 67

210
 Index

specifications C200H-OD219, 150

C200H-ID501, 154 C200H-OD21A, 139
C200H-IA121, 106 C200H-OD21B, 152
C200H-IA122, 107 C200H-OD411, 138
C200H-IA122V, 107 C200H-OD501 (dynamic), 158
C200H-IA221, 108 C200H-OD501 (static), 157
C200H-IA222, 109 C200HS-INT01, 140
C200H-IA222V, 109 C200H-TM001, 175
C200H-ID001, 110 Contact Output Unit, life expectancy, 129
C200H-ID002, 111 CPU, 103
C200H-ID211, 112, 141 Group-2 B7A Interface Units, 179
C200H-ID212, 113 High-density I/O Units, 154
C200H-ID215, 155 Power Supply, 103
C200H-ID216, 143 Standard I/O Units, 106
C200H-ID217, 144 SSS. See SYSMAC Support Software
C200H-ID218, 146
C200H-ID219, 147 Standard I/O Units, 27
C200H-IM211, 114 A-shape, 27
C200H-IM212, 115 B-shape, 27
C200H-MD115 (dynamic), 167 dimensions, 195
C200H-MD115 (static), 166 E-shape, 28
C200H-MD215 (dynamic), 170 specifications, 106
C200H-MD215 (static), 169 static electricity, preventing, 34
C200H-MD501 (dynamic), 164
stepping motor, 5
C200H-MD501 (static), 163
C200H-OA121-E, 116 surge current, output, 55
C200H-OA122-E, 117
SYSMAC LINK, 64
C200H-OA222V, 118
C200H-OA223, 119 SYSMAC NET Link, 65
C200H-OA224, 120 SYSMAC Support Software, 73
C200H-OC221, 121
C200H-OC222, 122 system configuration, 3
C200H-OC222V, 126 expanding the system, 64
C200H-OC223, 123
C200H-OC224, 124
C200H-OC224V, 128
C200H-OC225, 125
T–W
C200H-OC226, 127 terminal block, 51
C200H-OD211, 131
C200H-OD212, 132 transistor output, residual voltage, 54
C200H-OD213, 133 wiring
C200H-OD214, 134 AC Input Units, 53
C200H-OD215 (dynamic), 161 DC Input Units, 51
C200H-OD215 (static), 160 examples, 51
C200H-OD216, 136 I/O devices, 51
C200H-OD217, 137 I/O Units, 51
C200H-OD218, 149 power supply, 46

211
 Revision History

A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.

Cat. No. W236-E1-07

Revision code

The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the
previous version.

Revision code Date Revised content

1 December 1993 Original production
2 August 1994 Page 7: Flowchart changed. Page 17: DIP switch pin no. 5 function description changed.
Pages 8, 9, 11, 12 14, 16, 17, 31, 33, 40, 41, 56, 81, 91, 92, Page 43: Backplane Insulation Plate information changed.
156, 158, 159, 163: New CPU information added. Page 88: SYSMAC LINK/SYSMAC NET Link Optical Fiber
Pages 9, 11: Interrupt information added. Products added.
Page 9: RS-232C information added. Pages 151 to 153: Temperature Control Unit, Fuzzy Logic
Pages 9, 12, 11 14, 56, 85, 162: New SYSMAC LINK Units Unit, and Cam Positioner Unit specifications removed.
and SYSMAC NET Link Unit information added.
Pages 10 to 12: Information in the tables corrected.

3 February 1995 Group-2 B7A Interface Units were added beginning on Page 67: 5-6 SYSMAC Support Software (SSS) added.
page 156 and to the following pages: 13, 85, 95, 154, 158, Page 72: 9D correction added.
Page 73: First FAL number changed and “Communications
159, and 164–165 Errors” added.
Page 11: Execution time and number of instructions changed. Page 75: Table corrected.
Page 13: “Link compatible” and accompany text corrected. Page 78 and 80: Steps added to fuse and relay replacement
Page 20: Power supply diagrams added for CPUs. procedure and illustrations changed.
Page 34: Information on Interrupt Input Unit added. Page 90: Link Adapter model deleted.
Page 35: Caution added. Page 93: Small correction for LSS. SSS models added.
Page 36 and 44: Diagram corrected. Page 168: RS-232C port specifications added.
Page 39: Corrected first step and table in installation proce- Minor changes were made to the following pages: 16, 17,
dure.
23, 24, 58, 81, 83, 93, 95, and 164.

3A October 1995 Page 9: Maximum number of I/O points for Remote I/O Sys- Page 81: Note rewritten.
tem with Slave Units corrected to 800 points from 560 points. Pages 83, 84: DANGER note moved.
Pages 12, 13: LSS replaced with SSS in the table. Pages 85 to 93: Standard models updated and corrected.
Page 21: Functions for pin 5 in the table corrected. Notes Page 109: C200H-OA224 added.
added. Page 127: C200H-ID111 added.
Page 26: C200H-ID111 added to table. Page 139 to 153: Some resistance figures removed from the
Page 42: 24-VDC output connections added to the diagram. circuit configurations. C200H-OA121-E added. Other minor
Text added to the bottom of page. corrections.
Page 43: Bottom diagram changed and text deleted from the Pages 160 and 170: Specifications and notes corrected.
bottom of page. Page 173: Current consumptions for C200H-OA121-E,
Page 46: Caution removed. C200H-OA224, C200H-ID111, and C200H-DA002 added.
Page 63: C200H-DA002 added.

4 August 1996 Pages 8, 9, 10, 13, 16, 18, 19, 20, 35, 37, 44, 46, 86, 87, 97, Pages 25, 26, 97: E-shape Units added.
98, 99, 173, 174, 178: New C200HS-CPU01-EC/CPU21-EC/ Pages 36, 88, 128, 176: C200H-OD21A added.
CPU23-EC CPU and related information added. Page 46: Notes added to the top and bottom of the page.
Pages 8, 18, 20, 87: Conformance to EC directives and Page 82: Fuse specifications table added.
related information added for C200HS-CPU03-E CPU. Pages 88, 101, 175: C200H-IA122V added.
Pages 3, 12, 13, 61, 91, 95, 177: C200HS-SLK12/SLK22 Pages 88, 103. 175: C200H-IA222V added.
SYSMAC LINK Units changed to C200HW- Pages 88, 112, 176: C200H-OA222V, C200H-OA223,
SLK13/SLK14/SLK23/SLK24. C200H-OA122-E added. C200H-OA222 deleted.
Page 13: C200H-RT201-C added to Remote I/O (Wired) Page 111: Fuse voltage corrected for C200H-OA121-E circuit
Slave Units. configuration.
Page 21: Pin No. 6 function clarified. Page 113: Residual voltage for C200H-OA224 corrected.
Pages 21, 58, 95, 179: C200HS-CN222 and C200HS-CN422 Minor corrections made to the circuit configuration.
Connecting Cables added. Page 91, 177: CompoBus Units added.
Pages 24, 44, 46, 87, 97, 173, 178: New C200H-PS221-C Page 92: 3G2A9-AL006-E deleted from Link Adapters.
Power Supply Unit and related information added. Page 163: Minor addition made to the B7A transmission delay
Pages 24, 45: Terminal connections changed for Pages 171, 172: Voltage correction made for the common
C200H-PS211. power supply in the diagrams.
Pages 24, 87: Conformance to EC directives and related Pages 179 to 185: Dimensions section rearranged and cor-
information added for C200H-PS211 Power Supply Unit. rected.

5 April 1997 PLP section added in from of Section 1. Relay Output Units Pages 90, 122, 180, 182: C200H-OC222V, C200H-OC224V,
changed to Contact Output Units throughout the manual. and C200H-OC226 Contact Output Units added.
Page 94: Relay added to Optional Products.
C200H-CPU23-EC removed throughout the manual. Page 123: New Contact Output Units reflected.
Page 27: Note on C200H-OC226 dimensions added. Page 186: C200H-OC226 dimensions added.
Pages 85 to 87: Output Unit Relay and Output Units added to
the procedure.

6 June 1999 Page 28: C200H-ID218, C200H-ID219, and C200H-OD21B Page 101: Vibration, shock, grounding, and enclosure rating
added. information corrected.
Page 46: Crimp terminal information added. Pages 131, 132: C200H-OD212 and C200H-OD213 circuit
Page 53: Precautions for connecting two-wire sensors added. configurations corrected.
Pages 92, 114: C200H-OA221 removed from C200H Stan- Page 138: C200H-OD21A information corrected.
dard I/O Units. Page 145: C200H-ID218 and C200H-ID219 information
Page 93: C200H-ID218, C200H-ID219, and C200H-OD21B added.
added to C200H Group-2 High-density I/O Units. Page 148: C200H-OD21B information added.
Page 186: C200H-ID218, C200H-ID219, and C200H-OD21B
added to Current Drawn from 5-V Supply for Group-2 High-
density I/O Units.

07 March 2003 Page 22: Information in table changed in several places.

Pages 149, 151, 160, 162, 169, 171: Minor changes made to circuit configuration dia-
grams.
Page 180: Information related to connectable B7A Link Terminals changed and added in
several places.
Pages 202, 203: System configuration added and connection diagrams corrected.

213
OMRON Corporation
FA Systems Division H.Q.
66 Matsumoto
Mishima-city, Shizuoka 411-8511
Japan
Tel: (81)55-977-9181/Fax: (81)55-977-9045
Regional Headquarters
OMRON EUROPE B.V.
Wegalaan 67-69, NL-2132 JD Hoofddorp
The Netherlands
Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388
OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC
1 East Commerce Drive, Schaumburg, IL 60173
U.S.A.
Tel: (1)847-843-7900/Fax: (1)847-843-8568
OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD.
83 Clemenceau Avenue,
#11-01, UE Square,
Singapore 239920
Tel: (65)6835-3011/Fax: (65)6835-2711
 Authorized Distributor:

Cat. No. W236-E1-07 Note: Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan
Cat. No. W236-E1-07 C200HS Programmable Controllers INSTALLATION GUIDE